ENG - 6984924503 - Rev2 (Service Manual)

Medical Line
0051
Service Manual
Version 31 January 2020 – Rev. 2
Service Manual - Revision history
Rev. 2
Manual revision history, code 6984924503
Rev. Date Page Description of the changes
0 18.06.2019 - Document approval.

1 10.10.2019 11-11, 11-14, 21-4 Paragraph "Parts to be replaced periodically" improvement
(modified angulation chain code, added table with
replacement data).
Revised descriptions of cells 246, 263, 264.
(RDM 8808, RDM 8957, Complaint M18022)
2 31.01.2020 3-2, 3-3, 4-3, Added applied parts symbol on Apollo EZ identification label
11-30, 26-2 located on the equipment (IEC60601-1 3ed+AMD1
paragraph 7.2.10).
MET approved revision.
Revised tabletop characteristic data.
Revised cell 438 default value.
Spare Parts update.
(RDM 8761, RDM 9031, RDM 9052)
Villa Sistemi Medicali

Service Manual - Revision history
Rev. 2
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Service Manual – Contents
Rev. 2
Contents
1 INTRODUCTION 1-1
1.1 Icons appearing in the manual 1-1
1.2 How to contact the VILLA SISTEMI MEDICALI Technical Service 1-2
2 SAFETY INFORMATION 2-1

2.1 Warnings 2-2
2.1.1 Electromagnetic emissions 2-5
2.1.2 Electromagnetic immunity 2-6
2.1.3 Recommended separation distance for non-life supporting equipment 2-7
2.2 Radiological protection warning 2-8
2.3 Environmental risks and displacement 2-11
2.4 Symbols used 2-12
3 DESCRIPTION 3-1
3.1 ID plates 3-1
3.1.1 Identification plates "380/400V" version 3-2
3.1.2 Identification plates "415/480V" version 3-3
3.2 Description 3-4
4 TECHNICAL DATA 4-1

4.1 Technical features 4-1
4.2 Format divisions table in CM 4-7
4.3 Format divisions table in INCHES 4-8
4.4 Standards and regulations 4-9
4.5 Dimensions 4-10
4.5.1 Version with 2 way tabletop 4-10
4.5.2 Version with 4 way tabletop 4-11
5 PRE-
PRE - INSTALLATION 5-1
5.1 Space requirements 5-4
5.2 Electrical provisions 5-8
5.3 Adaptation to the mains voltage 5-9
5.4 Environmental conditions 5-9
6 INSTALLATION 6-1
6.1 Base positioning with beam and column 6-2
6.2 Tube supporting arm assembly 6-7
6.3 Spot Film Device assembly 6-8
Villa Sistemi Medicali i

Rev. 2
6.4 Left and right hand tabletop support arm assembly 6-12
6.4.1 Anti-entrapment device assembly (only for 2 way tabletop version) 6-14
6.5 Equipment cable connection 6-15
6.6 Image intensifier installation 6-25
6.6.1 Image Intensifier (I.I.) assembly 6-26
6.7 Tube - Collimator assembly 6-28
6.8 Covers assembly 6-33
6.9 Tabletop assembly 6-39
6.9.1 2 way tabletop assembly 6-39
6.9.2 4 way tabletop assembly 6-40
6.10 Mobile patient loading step (optional) assembly 6-43
6.11 DAP camera mount 6-44
6.12 Final Checks 6-45
7 THE FUNCTIONING LOGIC OF

O F THE TABLE 7-1
7.1 Functioning sequences 7-2
7.1.1 Powering up and initialisation sequence 7-2
7.1.2 Activation sequence for a movement 7-3
7.2 Fault Conditions 7-5
7.2.1 Generation of a condition alarm 7-5
7.2.2 Generation of an operating alarm 7-5
7.2.3 Generation of an alarm caused by the power circuit 7-6
8 IN/OUT INTERFACE CONNECTION

C ONNECTION 8-1
8.1 Output signals from the Apollo EZ table 8-1
8.2 Input signals towards the Apollo EZ table 8-3
9 ACCESS TECHNIQUE AND

A ND DESCRIPTION OF THE
TH E DATA GROUPS 9-1
10 ACCESS AND ADJUSTMENT OF GROUP 100 DATA 10-

10 - 1
10.1 Potentiometer adjustment 10-4
10.1.1 Cell data and list 10-5
10.1.2 ANGULATION potentiometer adjustment (cells 101 – 102) 10-9
10.1.3 SCAN potentiometer adjustment (cells 103 – 104) 10-10
10.1.3.1 Version with 2 way tabletop 10-10
10.1.4 TILTING potentiometer adjustment (cells 105 and 106) 10-12
10.1.5 LONGITUDINAL TABLETOP potentiometer adjustment (cells 107 and 108) 10-14
10.1.6 SOURCE TO FILM DISTANCE potentiometer adjustment (cells 113 – 114) 10-16
10.1.6.1 Version with SID 1000 ÷ 1500 mm (39.4" ÷ 59") 10-16
10.1.6.2 Version with SID 1100 ÷ 1800 mm (43.3" ÷ 70.9") 10-17
ii Villa Sistemi Medicali

Rev. 2
10.1.7 TRANSVERSAL TABLETOP potentiometer adjustment (cells 115 – 116) 10-18

10.1.8 COMPRESSION FORCE potentiometer adjustment (cells 123 – 124) 10-20
10.1.9 GRID 1 potentiometer adjustment (cells 125 – 126) 10-21
10.1.10 CASSETTE CLOSE potentiometer adjustment (cells 127 – 128) 10-22
10.1.10.1 CASSETTE TIGHTENING switch adjustment 10-23
10.1.11 CROSS SUBDIVISION potmenter adjustment (optional) (cells 129 – 130) 10-25
10.1.12 SHUTTER potentiometer adjustment (cells 131 – 132) 10-26
10.1.13 GRID 2 potentiometer adjustment (cells 133 – 134) 10-27
11 ACCESS AND DATA FUNCTION

F UNCTION OF ALL GROUPS
GROUP S (EXCEPT GROUP 100)
10 0) 11-
11 - 1
11.1 Group 200 – Installation data 11-4
11.1.1 Function of the parameters of group 200 11-4
11.2 Group 300 – PDI controlled motor data 11-17
11.2.1 Theory of functioning of an axis with PID control 11-17
11.2.2 Motors check data function 11-20
11.3 Group 400 / 500 / 600 – Dimensions and runs 11-24
11.3.1 Range of runs carried out by movements with potentiometer feedback 11-24
11.3.2 Equipment mechanical dimensions 11-27
11.3.3 Data relative to single fault potentiometer controls 11-31
11.3.4 Spot Film Device cassette and shutters run 11-37
11.3.4.1 Calculation of the cassette run 11-38
11.3.4.2 Calculation of the shutters run 11-41
11.3.5 Safety aspects for PDI-controlled movements 11-43
11.4 Position 701 – EEprom copy 11-45
11.5 Position 711 – Clock settings and reset alarm memory 11-48
11.6 Position 721 – Test Spot Film Device and table life 11-51
11.6.1 Spot Film Device test 11-52
11.6.2 Table test 11-54
11.7 Position 751 – Alarms memory 11-57
11.8 Position 850 – Table cycles memory 11-67
12 SINGLE FAULT OPERATING

OPER ATING LOGIC 12-
12 - 1
13 FUNCTIONALITY 13-
13 - 1
13.1 Collision 13-1
13.1.1 Safety barrier 13-5
13.1.2 Anti-entrapment system 13-6
13.2 Compressor 13-7
13.3 Collimator 13-8
13.4 Table automatic positioning 13-9
Villa Sistemi Medicali iii

Rev. 2
14 OPERATING MODES 14-

14 - 1
14.1 Spot Film Device 14-1
14.1.1 "Standard radiography" performance block diagram 14-2
14.1.2 "Rapid sequence" block diagram 14-3
14.2 Standard tomographic 14-4
14.2.1 "Standard tomography" block diagram 14-5
14.2.2 "Sequential tomography" block diagram 14-6
14.3 Direct 14-7
14.4 Digital 14-8
14.4.1 "Digital radiography" block diagram 14-9
14.5 Digital Tomography 14-10
14.5.1 "Digital tomography" block diagram 14-11
14.5.2 "Sequential digital tomography" block diagram 14-12
14.6 Angiographic 14-13
14.6.1 "Stepping angio" block diagram 14-14
14.7 Stitching 14-15
14.7.1 "Stitching" block diagram 14-16
15 EMERGENCY END RUN 15-

15 - 1
16 HARDWARE ADJUSTMENT
ADJUSTME NT 16-
16 - 1
16.1 SID speed setting (only for versions with SID 1100 1800 mm / 43.3" 59") 16-1
17 THREE-
THREE - PHASE INVERTER
INVER TER 17-
17 - 1
17.1 Inverter input/output functions 17-2
17.2 Inverter hardware setting 17-3
17.3 Inverter software parameters setting 17-3
17.3.1 Parameters with data modified by Villa Sistemi Medicali 17-4
17.3.2 Parameters that maintain the default settings 17-5
17.4 Access to parameters for writing 17-7
17.5 Procedure for restoring the default parameters 17-8
18 FUNCTION OF THE OUTPUTS

O UTPUTS BOARD LEDS 18-
18 - 1
19 CHECKING THE RADIOGRAPHIC

RADI OGRAPHIC EXPOSURE RESULTS
RE SULTS 19-
19 - 1
19.1 Spot Film Device adjustment 19-1
19.1.1 Checking the longitudinal positioning of the cassette 19-2
19.1.2 Checking the transversal positioning of the cassette 19-3
19.1.3 Checking the positioning of the shutters 19-3
19.2 X-ray Tube-Collimator alignment and X-ray beam perpendicularity adjustment 19-4
19.3 Touch Screen collimator size adjustment 19-6
iv Villa Sistemi Medicali

Rev. 2
20 DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING

T ROUBLESHOOTING 20-
20 - 1
20.1 Troubleshooting for displayed diagnoses 20-3
20.2 Troubleshooting for faults or malfunctions not recognised by the processor 20-45
20.2.1 Table 20-45
20.2.2 Spot Film Device 20-47
21 MAINTENANCE AND
A ND CLEANING 21-
21 - 1
21.1 Maintenance the operator can carry out 21-2
21.2 Maintenance that can be carried out by the Authorised Technician 21-3
21.3 Parts to be replaced periodically 21-4
22 TOUCH SCREEN CONFIGURATION

CONF IGURATION AS "CONSOLE
"CONSOL E 1" OR "CONSOLE 2" 22-
22 - 1
22.1 Automatic voice MSG language setup 22-3
23 FIRMWARE UPGRADE 23-

23 - 1
23.1 Touch screen console firmware upgrade 23-1
23.2 Cabinet CPU firmware upgrade 23-4
23.3 Service data backup on USB stick 23-5
23.4 Touch Screen collimator firmware upgrade 23-6
24 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION

CALI BRATION PROCEDURE 24-
24 - 1
25 WIRING DIAGRAMS AND

A ND DRAWINGS 25-
25 - 1
25.1 List of wiring diagrams and drawings 25-2
26 SPARE PARTS 26-

26 - 1
Note
No part of this publication can be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed or translated
without the approval of VILLA SISTEMI MEDICALI S.p.A.
This manual in English is the original version.
Villa Sistemi Medicali v

Rev. 2
vi Villa Sistemi Medicali

Service Manual - Introduction
Rev. 2
1 INTRODUCTION
Note
This manual has been updated to reflect the state of the product with which it is
sold, to provide a proper reference while troubleshooting and repair operations,
commonly carried out by the service engineer, are being performed.
The manual might not reflect variations to the product if they do not affect how it
works.
The remote controlled table Apollo EZ is a radiological unit that can perform general
radiographic examinations. In particular, depending on its related accessories, examinations
which require the use of contrast fluids find their optimal application with this unit.
The aim of this manual is to instruct the user on the safe and effective use of the device.
The device must be used in compliance with the procedures described, and never be used for
purposes different from those herewith indicated.
Apollo EZ is an electro-medical device and can only be used under the supervision of a
physician or highly qualified personnel, with the necessary knowledge on X-ray protection.
The user is liable as concerns the legal fulfilment related to the installation and the operation of
the device.
1.1 Icons appearing in the manual
This icon indicates a “NOTE”: please read the items marked by this icon thoroughly.
This icon indicates a “WARNING”: the items marked by this icon refer to safety
aspects of the patient and/or operator.
Villa Sistemi Medicali 1-1

Service Manual - Introduction
Rev. 2
1.2 How to contact the VILLA SISTEMI MEDICALI

Technical Service
For any technical questions, please contact:
• Telephone: +39 02 488591
• Fax: +39 02 48859222
• E-mail: service_support@villasm.com
1-2 Villa Sistemi Medicali

Service Manual – Safety information
Rev. 2
2 SAFETY INFORMATION
Warning
All the information provided in this chapter should be read carefully and implemented,
where appropriate, to avoid damage to equipment or injury to persons.
VILLA SISTEMI MEDICALI designs and builds the devices in compliance with the safety
requirements; furthermore it supplies all information necessary for correct use, and the
warnings related to danger associated with X-ray generating units.
Villa Sistemi Medicali cannot be held responsible for:

• the use of Apollo EZ different from the intended use
• damage to the unit, the operator or the patient, caused both by incorrect installation and
maintenance different from the procedures described in the user's and service manual
supplied with the unit, and by incorrect operations
• mechanical and/or electrical modifications made during and after installation.
Warning
Do not modify this equipment without authorization of the manufacturer.
Technical intervention must only be performed by qualified technicians authorised by Villa

Sistemi Medicali.
Only authorised personnel can remove the protections to the electrical cabinet and the
equipment and gain access to live and moving parts.

Service Manual - Safety information
Rev. 2
2.1 Warnings
Apollo EZ is suitable for use in hospitals and the connection to the mains grid cannot be carried
out in buildings that provide "domestic" type power supplies.
Warning
To avoid the risk of electric shock, this device must be connected only to earthed
mains power supplies.
This device has not been designed to be used in environments where vapours, anaesthetic
mixtures flammable with air, or oxygen and nitrous oxide, can be detected.
Avoid the entry of water or other liquids into the device to prevent short circuits and corrosion.
Before cleaning the device, please disconnect it from the line voltage.
All movements are controlled by a powerful and sophisticated electronic microprocessor

system. The speeds, positions, the start and stop of these movements are controlled and
managed by the logic of the unit. The safety devices play a fundamental aspect in this logic so
as to ensure maximum safety for both patient and operator. Nevertheless, the operator MUST
ALWAYS PAY THE UTMOST ATTENTION when a movement is activated. The red
EMERGENCY buttons on the control console and on the front panel of the unit can be
pressed in the event the user experiences a situation of danger. These buttons will immediately
stop any movement and operation and are a valuable tool offered to the operator in addition to
the unit's intrinsic safety devices.
Before activation of the motorised parts such as tilting, the tabletop, the angulation
and the scan, make sure the patient is properly positioned and has the legs and arms
inside the perimeter of the tabletop. Use the handgrips where possible. During motorised
movements, objects that may interfere with the movements themselves should not be close to
the table.
Pay close attention to people in the X-ray room.

Rev. 2
Warning
When the system receives power, motorised movements may be activated
intentionally or accidentally.
The areas highlighted in the image below therefore pose a risk of entrapment,
between the support structure for the Spot Film Device and the support arms of the
patient tabletop, in the event that motorised movement is activated.
ENTERING OR REMAININ
REMAININGG IN THESE AREAS IS FORBIDDEN WHILE THE
DEVICE IS OPERATIONAL.
OPERATIONAL.
The following symbols attached to the structure of the table indicate the risk of
entrapment and the prohibition against entering the danger zones:
Symbol indicating Symbol indicating:

"Warning: danger of entrapment" "Prohibition against entering the
(ISO 7010:2011 W019) a rea inside the support arms for
the patient tabletop "

Rev. 2
In the unlikely event that a person is present within the danger zone and a movement
is activated intentionally or accidentally, an emergency button must be activated
immediately.
immediately These buttons are coloured red to be immediately visible and may be
activated by simply pressing with force. As soon as one of the buttons is pressed, the
power to the device is cut off and all movements are immediately interrupted.
The position of the emergency buttons is illustrated in the following images:
Emergency buttons on the Emergency buttons on the

control console
consol e Spot Film Device
(depending on the configuration of the (two buttons are present, one on the
facility, either one or two control right side and one on the left side)
consoles may be present)
Remember that, on the basis of local regulations, other emergency buttons may be
present in the exam room and/or in the control room.
All users must be familiar with the placement and functioning of these safety devices
before using the equipment.
In the event of loss of voltage for longer than that sustainable by the electronic control of the
table, it is possible that the examination taking place is cancelled, with the inhibition of the
tabletop, scan and angulation movements that may harm the patient. The Spot Film Device will
be initialised and if the cassette is present, the display will indicate its removal in order to
continue.
Apollo EZ cannot be installed in operating rooms.
Apollo EZ must be turned off while electrosurgical or similar devices are in use.
Keep clean, and if disinfection of the parts that may come into contact with the patient is
deemed necessary, follow the instructions in Chapter21.

Rev. 2
2.1.1 Electromagnetic emissions
In compliance with standard IEC 60601-1-2, the Apollo EZ is suitable for use in the
electromagnetic environment described below. The customer or user of the system must
ensure that it is used in said environment.
Emissions test Conformity EMC environment of use

RF Emissions Group I The Apollo EZ uses RF energy only for internal
CISPR 11 functioning. As a result, its RF emissions are very
low and most likely will not cause any
interference in electronic devices located nearby.
Class A The Apollo EZ is suitable for use in all
environments other than domestic environments
and those directly connected to a low voltage
public mains power supply which supplies
buildings used for domestic purposes.
Harmonics emissions Not applicable
IEC 61000-3-2
Voltage fluctuations / Not applicable
flicker emissions
IEC 61000-3-3

Rev. 2
2.1.2 Electromagnetic immunity
In compliance with standard IEC 60601-1-2, the Apollo EZ is suitable for use in the
electromagnetic environment specified. The purchaser or user of the Apollo EZ must guarantee
that it is used in the environment described below:
Immunity IEC 60601-

60601 - 1 - 2: Compliance
Electromagnetic environment
test test level level
Electrostatic 8 kV contact Test level Floors should be wood, concrete
discharge (ESD) 2/4/8/15 kV air IEC 60601-1-2 or ceramic tile. If the flooring is
IEC 61000-4-2 covered with synthetic material,
relative humidity must be at
least 30%.
Radiated 3 V/m Test level Portable and mobile RF
electromagnetic from 80 MHz to 2.7 IEC 60601-1-2 communication devices should
field GHz not be used in the immediate
IEC 61000-4-3 vicinity of components of the
Apollo EZ, including the cables.
Minimum distance 30 cm
Electrical fast 2 kV for power Test level The quality of the mains voltage
transient/burst supply lines IEC 60601-1-2 must be the same as a typical
IEC 61000-4-4 commercial or hospital
1 kV for input/output environment.
lines > 3 m
Surge 0.5/1 kV differential Test level The quality of the mains voltage
IEC 61000-4-5 mode IEC 60601-1-2 must be the same as a typical
commercial or hospital
0.5/1/2 kV common environment.
mode
Disturbances 3V Test level Portable and mobile RF
conducted, induced from 150 kHz to IEC 60601-1-2 communication devices should
by RF fields 80 MHz not be used in the immediate
IEC 61000-4-6 vicinity of components of the
6V Apollo EZ, including the cables.
ISM Frequencies Minimum distance 30 cm
Voltage drop, short 0% Un for 0.5 cycles Test level The quality of the mains voltage
breaks and voltage 0% Un for 1 cycle IEC 60601-1-2 must be the same as a typical
variations of the 70% Un for 25 cycles commercial or hospital
power supply feed 0% Un for 5 s environment. If the user of the
line Apollo EZ requires continued
IEC 61000-4-11 operation during power mains
interruptions, it is recommended
that the Apollo EZ be powered
by an uninterruptible power
supply or battery.
Power frequency 30A/m Test level Power frequency magnetic fields
(50/60 Hz) IEC 60601-1-2 should be at levels characteristic
magnetic field of a typical commercial or
IEC 61000-4-8 hospital environment.

Rev. 2
2.1.3 Recommended separation distance

distanc e for non-
non - life supporting
equipment
The Apollo EZ is designed to operate in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF

disturbances are controlled.
The customer or person operating the system can contribute to preventing electromagnetic
interference by ensuring a minimum distance of no less than 30 cm between mobile and
portable RF communication devices (transmitters) and any component of the Apollo EZ. If this
distance is not maintained the performance of these devices may be affected.

Rev. 2
2.2 Radiological protection warning

VILLA SISTEMI MEDICALI designs and builds its devices in compliance with the safety
requirements; furthermore it supplies all information and warnings related to hazards
associated with equipment connected to X-ray generating units.
Personnel authorised to perform radiological examinations must observe the protection

regulations against ionising radiation as shown below:
• Where appropriate, dedicated protection must be used (lead-lined clothing) to protect the
patient from the stray radiations in areas adjacent to those from X-ray.
• Only the patient must be present in the room while the X-ray examinations is being
performed. If the examination requires, medical and paramedical personnel or specifically
authorised personnel can be present, only if provided with radiation protective clothing.
Depending on the ongoing examination, the staff in the room must stand in the areas
shown in the diagram below during ray emissions.
6
Occupation zone
5 (see Figure 2-2)
Figure 2-1: Horizontal table, front view
Note
The front view shows a 600x600x2000 mm occupation zone as required by the
applied standards. In reality, because the spot film-I.I.-tube unit has a maximum
range of 1344 mm, the total occupation zone is the one shown in Figure 2-2. This
zone takes into account the aforementioned range.

Rev. 2
Max. occupation
zone
600x2243 mm
H = 2000 mm
Figure 2-2: Horizontal table, plan view
Occupation zone
(see Figure 2-4)
1400 mm
B
Figure 2-3: Vertical table, front view

Rev. 2
450 mm
Occupation zone
600x600 mm
H = 1700 mm
Figure 2-4: Vertical table, plan view
The maximum values of stray radiations in the indicated zones are given in the table below.
These values were measured as described in the reference standard IEC 60601-1-3 and
particularly for radiological factors with a continuous emission value of 120 kV, 3 mA.
Figure Ref. H from the ground Dose

1 1 350 mm (13.8") 0.055 mGy/h
1 2 600 mm (23.6") 0.22 mGy/h
1 3 834 mm (32.8") 2.42 mGy/h
1 4 1200 mm (47.2") 7.6 mGy/h
1 5 1400 mm (55.1") 6.9 mGy/h
1 6 1600 mm (63.0") 7.32 mGy/h
1 7 1800 mm (70.9") 5.25 mGy/h
1 8 2000 mm (78.7") 3.37 mGy/h
3 A 350 mm (13.8") 1.1 mGy/h
3 B 600 mm (23.6") 4.68 mGy/h
3 C 1000 mm (39.4") 3.6 mGy/h
3 D 1200 mm (47.2") 3.05 mGy/h
3 E 1400 mm (55.1") 2.21 mGy/h
3 F 1600 mm (63.0") 2.6 mGy/h
3 G 1700 mm (66.9") 3.25 mGy/h
3 H 2000 mm (78.7") 3.7 mGy/h

Rev. 2
2.3 Environmental risks and displacement

Some parts of the Apollo EZ contain materials and liquids that must be disposed of at
reclamation centres designated by the Local Health Authorities at the end of the equipment'
life cycle.
In particular, the device contains the following materials and/or components:
• Motor reduction gears : lubricating oil, steel, aluminium
• Motors : iron, copper, non-biodegradable plastic casings
• Spot Film Device: non-biodegradable plastic casings, lead primary protections against
radiation
• Electrical cabinet: iron, aluminium, copper, non-biodegradable plastic materials, supports
for printed circuits.
Note
Information for users in the European Community, in compliance with 2011/65/EU
Directive on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical
and electronic equipment.
The symbol of the crossed waste container on the equipment or packaging shows
that the product, at the end of its lifecycle, must be collected separately from other
types of waste.
The separate collection of this equipment at the end of its lifecycle is organised and
managed by the manufacturer. Users who need to dispose of this equipment should
therefore contact the manufacturer and follow the procedure adopted by the
manufacturer for the separate collection of the equipment at the end of its lifecycle.
Proper separate collection for subsequent recycling, treatment and compatible
environmental disposal of equipment helps avoid possible negative effects on the
environment and on health and encourages the reuse or recycling of the materials
that the equipment is made from.
Illegal disposal of the product by the owner of the equipment will result in
administrative sanctions, as provided for by applicable regulations.

Rev. 2
2.4 Symbols used

The following symbols are used in this Manual and on the Apollo EZ:
Symbol Description
Device with type B applied parts
Some parts of the equipment contain materials and liquids that

must be disposed of at reclamation centres designated by the Local
Health Authorities at the end of its life cycle
∼ A.C.
N Connection point to the neutral conductor
R S T Connection point to the three-phase line conductors
Protection earthing
Dangerous voltage
Follow the use instructions
Product identification code
Serial number
Date of manufacture
Spot Film Device
Inherent filtration
Conformity to the EC 93/42 Directive and subsequent amendments

and additions

Service Manual – Description
Rev. 2
3 DESCRIPTION
3.1 ID plates
plates
6
7 7
2 1b

Service Manual - Description
Rev. 2
3.1.1 Identification plates "380/400V" version
1a 1b
Apollo EZ data label Apollo EZ identification label
(positioned on the electrical cabinet) (positioned on the equipment)
2
Spot Film Device
data label
3 4
"Connect TV chain only" Warning
label (inside the electrical cabinet) label
Collegare solo catena TV

Connect TV chain only
5
"Read the user instructions"
label
6 7
Sign Sign
"Warning: danger of entrapment" "Prohibition against entering the area inside
(ISO 7010:2011 W019) the support arms for the patient tabletop"
8a 8b
Sign "Warning: do not install the patient Sign "Warning: install the patient footrest on
footrest on this side of the tabletop". this side of the tabletop".
Only present in the event that there's a Only present in the event that there's a
shoulder rest (optional accessory) shoulder rest (optional accessory)

Rev. 2
3.1.2 Identification plates "415/480V" version
1a 1b
Apollo EZ data label Apollo EZ identification label
(positioned on the electrical cabinet) (positioned on the equipment)
1c 1d
cMETus certification label UDI label
(positioned on the electrical cabinet) (positioned on the electrical cabinet)
3
2 "Connect TV chain only"
Spot Film Device label (inside the electrical cabinet)
data label
Collegare solo catena TV
Connect TV chain only
4
Warning label
5
"Read the user instructions"
label
6 7
Sign Sign
"Warning: danger of entrapment" "Prohibition against entering the area inside
(ISO 7010:2011 W019) the support arms for the patient tabletop"
8a 8b
Sign "Warning: do not install the patient Sign "Warning: install the patient footrest on
footrest on this side of the tabletop". this side of the tabletop".
Only present in the event that there's a Only present in the event that there's a
shoulder rest (optional accessory) shoulder rest (optional accessory)

Rev. 2
3.2 Description
Apollo EZ is a universal radiology diagnostic table that can satisfy all needs, used for
examinations of the digestive system, the skull and skeleton, urography, myelography, vascular
examinations, lungs, bronchography, and when supplemented by a digital acquisition system,
angiography.
The Apollo EZ table is available in the following configurations:
• SFD version with Spot Film Device, divisions in bands or crosses (optional)
• SFD "Dual Grid" version, double grid with no divisions, optimised for use with "Flat Panel
Static Wi-Fi"
• DRF version, where the Spot Film Device is not present and the table is equipped with
"Dynamic Flat Panel" with 1 or 2 crosses and large capture surface (43x43cm).
The basic functional concepts of the Apollo EZ table are:
• footprint as small as possible
• transverse movement (2 way) and transverse and longitudinal (4 way) Tabletop
• reduced skin-imaging receptor distance
• laminate (standard version) or micro-sandwich Tabletop with integrated accessory profiles
• reduced I.I.-film distance to avoid parallax correction (when applicable).
The complex movements and functions are controlled by the remote control console located in
an XR protected area.
The main movements of the table are replicated on the on-board control panel.
An automatic collimator limits the radiated field.
This accessory may consist of a square-rectangular limitation or circular limitation by means of
a collimator with iris in addition to the square limitation and is adjusted so that the X-ray beam
is aligned with the image receptor across the full range of movement (minimum and maximum
SID) and angulation (from -40° to +40°) within the limits set by standard IEC 60601-2-54.
In the event that an image receptor external to the Spot Film Device is used, the opening of
the collimator is set manually by the user.
The DRF version is equipped with a square-rectangular limitation collimator without iris.
To meet the needs related to the fluoroscopic mode and the acquisition of images using digital
systems, the table is arranged such to accept image intensifiers from a minimum of 9"
(nominal) maximum input range up to a maximum of 12" (nominal).
All the movement commands are "deadman".
Apollo EZ was designed and constructed in accordance with the European provisions laid down
for the attainment of the CE mark according to European Directive EC 93/42 on Medical
devices, ensuring the maximum safety for the operator and the patient.

Rev. 2
Apollo EZ is supplied with both standard accessories and optional accessories. The following
table lists all available accessories making the distinction between standard, being those
normally supplied with the equipment, and optional accessories that need to be specifically
requested when ordering.
Ref. Description Accessory type
A Patient footrest Standard

B Patient handgrip (N°2 items) Standard
C Shoulder support Optional
D Leg rest (N°2 items) Optional
E Band-tightener with compression band Optional
F Cassette side support Optional
G Patient step Optional
B
A C
D
E
Figure 3-1: Tabletop accessories

Rev. 2
Warning
• Verify that the accessories are firmly fixed before positioning the patient for the
exam.
• Verify that the patient footrest is firmly hooked to the tabletop's metal frame;
the position is correct if both release buttons are completely raised and the red
line is not visible.
If this condition isn't met, use the handles to move the patient footrest without
pressing on the buttons until it locks correctly (red line no longer visible).
Warning
In the event that a shoulder support is present (optional accessory "C"), the tabletop
will include labels that indicate on which side the patient footrest should be attached.
NEVER insert the patient footrest on the side of the tabletop that has the
prohibition label.

Service Manual – Technical data
Rev. 2
4 TECHNICAL
TECH NICAL DATA
4.1 Technical features
General features
Type Apollo EZ
Manufacturer Villa Sistemi Medicali S.p.A.
20090 Buccinasco (MI) Italy
Device type and classification according to class I with type B applied parts
IEC 60601-1
Degree of protection according to IEC 60529 IPX0

Operating mode continuous operation
Use equipment not suitable for use in the presence
of flammable anaesthetic mixtures
Electrical characteristics
Standard voltage 3N~ 380/400 Vac ±10%

3N~ 415/480 Vac ±10%
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Maximum current 5 A @ 380/400 Vac
4 A @ 415/480 Vac
Fuses on isolation transformer T1 T 7A H – 500V @ 380/400 Vac
(F1, F2, F3) T 6A H – 500V @ 415/480 Vac
Fuse on transformer T2 (F4) T 500mA L – 250V
Fuses on transformers T3, T4 (F9, F15) T 3A L – 250V
Device protection Threephase thermal-magnetic circuit breaker
6.3 – 10 A 400 Vac
Power 3 kVA
Line Impedance < 1.0 ohm @ 380/400 Vac ±10%
< 1.0 ohm @ 415/480 Vac ±10%
Voltage drop on load < 2 % @ 380/400 Vac ±10%
< 2 % @ 415/480 Vac ±10%

Service Manual - Technical data
Rev. 2
Mechanical features
Weight 900 kg (1985 lbs) – 2-way tabletop

1000 kg (2205 lbs) – 4-way tabletop
Height horizontal table and min SID 209 cm (82.3") - SID 150 cm
229 cm (90.2") - SID 180 cm
Height horizontal table and max SID 259 cm (102.0") - SID 150 cm (59.0")
299 cm (117.7") - SID 180 cm (70.9")
Total depth 198 cm (78.0")
Total depth with patient step (optional) 228 cm (89.8")
Length with tabletop central and table 210 cm (82.7") – 2-way tabletop
horizontal 225 cm (88.6") – 4-way tabletop
Prepared for I.I. standard fixed connector
Maximum I.I. size 12 inch
Minimum height from the ground 83 cm (32.7")
Electrical cabinet containing all electrical and 52 x 55 x 195 cm
electronic controls, including the TV-I.I. chain (20.5" x 21.6" x 76.8")
command module and eventual digital module
Electrical cabinet weight 145kg (320 lbs)
Control console 36 x 36 x 12.5 cm (14.2" x 14.2" x 4.9")
Console weight 5.2 kg (11.5 lbs)
Runs
Tilting + 90° / - 30°

Longitudinal tabletop (with 4 way tabletop only) 120 cm (47.2") = ± 60 cm (± 23.6")
Transversal tabletop 35 cm (13.8") = ± 17.5 cm (± 6.9")
Spot Film Device scan 134 cm (52.8") – 2-way tabletop
117 cm (46.0") – 4-way tabletop
Source to film distance 100 – 150 cm (39.4" – 59")
110 – 180 cm (43.3" – 70.9")
Angulation + 40° / - 40°
Compressor (run of the cone in X-ray beam) 37 cm (14.6")
Tube rotation + 180° (clockwise) / - 90° (anticlockwise);
stopping points at 0°, ± 15°, ± 30° and every
10° up to the limit
Collimator rotation + 90° / - 90°

Rev. 2
Speed
Tilting slow 4.5 °/sec

fast 6 °/sec (modifiable)
Longitudinal tabletop (for 4 way tabletop 5.5 cm/sec (2.2"/sec) ± 10% (fixed)
models only)
Transversal tabletop 5 cm/sec (2"/sec) ± 10% (fixed)
Spot Film Device scan 20 cm/sec (7.9"/sec) (maximum) with
acceleration step for small or large movements
Source to film distance (SID) ascent: 2.2 cm/sec (0.9"/sec) standard;
3.0 cm/sec (1.2"/sec) maximum
descent: 3.0 cm/sec (1.2"/sec) standard;
4.5 cm/sec (1.8"/sec) maximum
tolerance: ± 10%
Angulation 11 °/sec ± 10% (modifiable)
Compressor 5 cm/sec (2.0"/sec) ± 10%
Compressor
Compressor - tabletop distance 13 cm ÷ 50 cm (5.1" ÷ 19.7")

Compression force settable from 3 kg to 15 kg with step of 0.5 kg
Tabletop
Maximum weight of patient Up to 200 kg (440 lbs), without any movement

limitations
Dimension 210 x 74 cm (82.7" x 29.1") – 2-way tabletop
225 x 74 cm (88.6" x 29.1") – 4-way tabletop
Dimension of the radio-transparent zone 201.4 x 55.6 cm (79.3" x 21.9") – 2-way tabletop
213 x 50 cm (83.9" x 19.7") – 4-way tabletop
Tabletop height from floor 83 cm (32.7”) (with standard under-floor
installation plate) in the center of the tabletop
Surfaces flat
Standard material laminated
Optional material Micro-sandwich: carbon fiber + Rohacell + HPL
Filtration for standard model ≤ 1.1 mm Al eq @ 100 kVp SEV 3.6 mm Al
Filtration for carbon fibre model ≤ 0.5 mm Al eq @ 100 kVp SEV 3.6 mm Al
X-ray centre / table extremity distance 38 cm (15") from both sides – 2-way tabletop
0 cm (0") – 4-way tabletop
Skin – film distance 7.5 cm (2.9”) minimum for 2-way tabletop
7.8 cm (3.1”) minimum for 4-way tabletop
Skin – I.I. distance 9.7 cm (3.8”) minimum for 2-way tabletop
10 cm (3.9”) minimum for 4-way tabletop
Accessory holder guide integrated

Rev. 2
Spot Film Device
Accepted cassette sizes from 13x18 cm (5"x7") to 43x43 cm (17"x17")

Divisions from 1 to 4 in bands (standard)
NOTE: 4 or 6 in cross (optional)
Not applicable to the "Dual Grid" model
Spot Film Device cassette movement with belt drive without tray
Operating modes standard programme
rapid sequence (not applicable to the "Dual
Grid" model)
Min. positioning time of receptor from park to cassette: 0.8 sec
exposure in standard mode VDX: 0 sec, the sensor can remain in the field
Max. positioning time of receptor from park to cassette: ≤ 1.2 sec
exposure in standard mode VDX: 1.3 sec
Average speed in rapid sequence 2 im/sec
Lead lined shutters integrated
Grid vibrating, parkable
I.I. head fastening pre-arranged
AEC pre-arranged
Collimator
Collimation with 2 axes (standard) rectangular and square

Collimation with 3 axes (optional) rectangular, square and iris
Additional filtration (optional) for both models with additional filter change (2 mm Al / 1 Al +
0.1 mm Cu / 1Al + 0.2 mm Cu) manual or
motorised
Limitation automatic
manual: via joystick on the console and keys on
the collimator
Operating modes automatic with/without Hold mode
manual
Light for centring with LED lamp (min 160 lux @ 1 m) with timer
or with requested turn-off
Min. dimension of the ray beam @ 1 m < 1 cm2 (0.39 inch2)
X-ray field coverage 43 x 43 cm (17" x 17") @ SID = 100 cm (39.4")
Stray radiation ≤ 45 mR/h @ 150 kVp 350W
Inherent filtration of collimator with 2 axes 1 mm Al eq @ 75 kVp SEV ≥ 2.4 mm Al
Inherent filtration of collimator with 3 axes 2 mm Al eq @ 75 kVp SEV ≥ 2.4 mm Al

Rev. 2
Tomography
Type semi arc / flat with electronic algorithms

Max. layer height 35 cm (13.8")
Layer increase with step of 0.1 cm (0.04")
Automatic layer increase selectable with automatic increase based on
the Tomo angle
Speed 11.2 – 22.4 °/sec (modifiable)
Angles 7° - 20° - 30° - 45°
Tomography exposure times (in sec) Degrees 1^ 2^ 3^ 4^
speed speed speed speed
7° 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3
20° 1.8 1.3 1.0 0.9
30° 2.6 2.0 1.6 1.3
45° 4.0 3.0 2.4 2.0
Direction from right to left or vice versa (settable)
Sequential Tomography sequential program with emission forward and
back until divisions are finished with automatic
increase of the layer without stopping and
returning to vertical after each exposure
Scan movement range the tomography is permitted in variable scan
positions according to the angle and layer
selected
Stitching (Optional, only in VDX mode)
Type 2, 3 or 4 contiguous images acquired and joined;

scan speed, SID and tube angulation adjusted
at every step
Detector size 35 x 43 cm (13.8" x 17") or 43 x 43 cm (17" x 17")
Step length 35 cm (13.8") or 43 cm (17") (depending on the
length of the VDX detector)
Number of acquisition stations 2, 3 or 4 (selected by the user)
Direction of the scan Left to Right or Right to Left (selected by the
user)
SID Can be set at installation: from 140 cm (55.1")
to 180 cm (70.9") (150 cm (59") for models with
SID 150 cm (59"))
Overlap 7 cm (2.8") (preset - may be modified by the
Service Technician)
Average total scanning time (in sec) Station Time
2 10
3 20
4 30
Scan Permitted for the entire run
Rev. 2
Commands
Movement commands on consoles with a joystick

at the edge of the table with buttons
on the collimator panel (only for touch screen
version)
Function commands on the console
User interface with graphic touch screen
Command characteristics with deadman
Movements safeties single fault on the HW chain responsible for the
movement and the feed back
Accessories
Footrest (standard) supporting surface approx. 30 x 55 cm

(11.8" x 21.7")
Handgrips (standard) with ergonomic grip
Head rest and shoulder supports (optional) with shoulder retainers
Compression band (optional) with winder
Thigh supports (optional) adjustable
Side cassette holder for lateral projections with adjustable cassette holder arm
(optional)
Patient step (optional) folding
Environmental conditions
Operating conditions Temperature: from +10 to +40°

Humidity: from 30 to 75 %
Pressure: from 700 to 1060 hPa
Transport and storage conditions Temperature: from -20 to +70°
Humidity: ≤ 95% non-condensing
Pressure: >630 hPa

Rev. 2
4.2 Format divisions table in CM
13x18 18x13
18x24 9x24 9x12 (*) 24x18 12x18
24x24 12x24 12x12 (*)
24x30 12x30 30x24 15x24 15x12 (*) 10x24 10x12 (*)
30x30 15x30 10x30
18x43 43x18 21x18 14x18
15x40 40x15 20x15 13x15 10x15
20x40 10x40 40x20 20x20 13x20 10x20
30x35 15x35 10x35 35x30 17x30 12x30
30x40 15x40 10x40 40x30 20x30 13x30 10x30
35x35 17x35 12x35
35x43 17x43 12x43 43x35 21x35 14x35 11x35
43x43
(*) Optional
Note
The first number of the format refers to the transverse axis of the tabletop (right-
left of patient). The size indicated on the various divisions is nominal.
In the Apollo EZ "Dual Grid" version, the divisions of the formats are not available.
Rev. 2
4.3 Format divisions table in INCHES
5x7 7x5
8x10 4x10 4x5 (*) 10x8 5x8
10x12 5x12 12x10 6x10 6x5 (*) 4x10 4x5 (*)
9.5x9.5 4.7x9.5 3x9.5
7x17 17x7 8.5x7 5.7x7 4.3x7
11x14 5.5x14 3.7x14 14x11 7x11 4.7x11 3.5x11
14x14 7x14 4.7x14
14x17 7x17 4.7x17 17x14 8.5x14 5.7x14
17x17
(*) Optional
Note
The first number of the format refers to the transverse axis of the tabletop (right-
left of patient). The size indicated on the various divisions is nominal.
In the Apollo EZ "Dual Grid" version, the divisions of the formats are not available.

Rev. 2
4.4 Standards and regulations

Apollo EZ was designed and built using the regulations listed below as reference:
IEC 60601 1:2005, IEC 60601-
60601 - 1:2005/AMD1:2012
Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General requirements for basic safety and essential
performance
IEC 60601-
60601 - 1 - 2:2014
Electromagnetic compatibility – requirements and test
IEC 60601-
60601 - 1 - 3:2008, IEC 60601-
60601 - 1 - 3:2008/AMD:2013
Medical electrical equipment - Part 1-3: general requirements for radiation protection in
diagnostic X-ray equipment
IEC 60601-
60601 - 1 - 6:2010, IEC 60601-
60601 - 1 - 6:2010/AMD1:2013
Medical electrical equipment - Part 1-6: General requirements for safety - collateral standard:
Usability including IEC 62366: Application of usability engineering to medical devices.
IEC 60601-
60601 - 2 - 54:2009,
54 :2009, IEC 60601-
60601 - 2 - 54:2009/AMD1:2015
Medical Electrical Equipment – Part 2: Particular requirements for the basic safety and
essential performance of X-ray equipment for radiography and radioscopy
IEC 62366:2007, IEC 62366:2007/AMD1:2014
Medical devices – Application of usability engineering to medical devices
IEC 62304:2006, IEC 62304:2006/AMD1:2015
Medical device software - Software life-cycle processes.
0051 The CE mark certifies compliance of the Apollo EZ table to the 93/42/EEC
Directive and subsequent amendments and additions.
The manufacturer, in compliance with Directive 93/42/EEC is:

Villa Sistemi Medicali S.p.A.
Via Delle Azalee, 3
20090 Buccinasco – MILAN (Italy)
Besides the aforementioned standards, models 415/480V are also made in compliance with
those listed below:
CFR 21
Code Federal Regulation. Sub Chapter J
CAN/CSA-
CAN/CSA - C22.2 No 60601-
60601 - 1:14
Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General requirements for basic safety and essential
performance
ANSI/AAMI ES60601-
ES60601 - 1:2005/A2:2010/(R)2012
Medical electrical equipment, Part 1: General Requirements for Basic Safety and Essential
Performance.

Rev. 2
4.5 Dimensions
Dim ensions
4.5.1 Version with 2 way tabletop
Figure 4-1

Rev. 2
4.5.2 Version with 4 way tabletop
Figure 4-2

Rev. 2

Service Manual – Pre-installation
Rev. 2
5 PRE-
PRE -INSTALLATION
The instructions on the following pages guarantee that the installation performed will ensure
the remote-controlled Apollo EZ table will work properly.
The Manufacturer can provide any technical consultancy and assistance necessary right from
the pre-installation stage (if requested, to check the positioning of the equipment inside the X-
ray room).
The room should be prepared for the installation of the Apollo EZ table based on the choice of
fixing plate (Figure 5-1, Figure 5-2 or Figure 5-3) which is made considering that the maximum
weight of the machine (equipped with 12" I.I. and patient of 200kg / 440 lbs) is approximately
1200kg (2640 lbs).
Therefore, verify that the floor is capable of supporting the weight distributed over the entire
surface of the fixing plate.
Depending on the choice made, place the plate in the following way:
 Standard floor fixing plate
815
(32")
(18.5")
470
FRONT SIDE
78
Figure 5-1: Standard floor fixing plate (code 5584901000)
Remove the surface of the floor in an area measuring 500x850 mm (19.7"x33.5") until
reaching the concrete slab, so that the top surface of the plate is flush with the floor.
The concrete surface of the slab, under the plate, must be rough enough to ensure the
concrete to be poured adheres properly. Position the plate and carefully level it so that the
surface obtained is as level as possible. The fixing floor plate already has threaded holes
and M12 bolts for the anchorage of the base; these holes must be protected (e.g. by
inserting the fixing screws) so that they are not blocked during installation; pour the
concrete with a cement/sand ratio of 1:2.5, remove the surplus and let it dry for at least 6
hours.

Rev. 2
 Floor top plate
1890 (74.4")
77 (3")
77 (3") 465 (18.3") 901 (35.5") 370 (14.6") 77 (3")

551 (21.7")
1000 (39.4")
295 (11.6")
35 (1.4")
77 (3")
FRONT SIDE
Figure 5-2: Floor top plate (code 7184000800)
If masonry work cannot be carried out in the radiology room, a floor top fixing plate is available
that can be requested at the time of ordering.
Position the plate and fasten it to the floor by means of the fixing holes, using cast iron
anchors (supplied) or chemical anchors (not supplied), based on the characteristics of the floor.
Note
The floor top plate is not symmetric and therefore attention to its correct position
must be paid.

Rev. 2
 Weight distribution plate
2500 (98.4")
1500 (59.1")
50 (1.9")
FRONT SIDE
Figure 5-3: Weight distribution plate (code 7184000900)
If the slab does not have sufficient load bearing capacity a weight distribution plate is
available on request at the time of ordering.
This plate can be installed on the floor in two different ways:

1. Sunk into the floor
2. Fixed to the floor.
In the first case (11), follow the instructions given above for a plate of a smaller size and be
sure to remove an area of 2800x1800 mm (110.2"x70.9") from the upper surface of the
floor.
In the second case (2

2), the plate is fixed to the floor by means of the fixing holes and
masked by a raised construction that covers the structure of the plate itself.
Note
The weight distribution plate is not symmetrical so it's important to position it in the
correct way.

Rev. 2
5.1 Space requirements

requireme nts
Note
In order to unload the packaged main assembly easily, a forklift must be used or the
means of transport must be equipped with a ramp.
When assessing the size of the place of installation (including corridors, doors etc.) note that the
main assembly, once removed from the packaging, has the dimensions shown in Figure 5-4.
Figure 5-4

Rev. 2
The minimum height of the installation room must be greater than 2500 mm (8.2 ft), and the
recommended operating area on the front is 1000 mm (39.4"). An area at the sides is required
indicated in Figure 5-5 and Figure 5-6.
Note
Verify that, in the radiological room, direct audio and visual communication between
operator and patient is always possible.
Otherwise, provide proper support (i.e. lead glass or similar, interphone, etc.).
4500 (14.8 ft)

2230 (7.3 ft) 2270 (7.5 ft)
= =
(*)
A
200
(7.87") C
**
3600 (11.8")
200
(7.87")
1000 (3.281 ft)
D
**
(*) Minimum distance between standard floor fixing plate and wall with
cabinets in position A (inside the Apollo EZ tilting area) = 900 mm
(35.4")
Minimum distance between standard floor fixing plate and wall with
cabinets in position B (outside the Apollo EZ tilting area) = 600 mm
(23.6")
(**) 4 way table top (optional) movement limits.
Figure 5-5a: Minimum dimensions for Apollo EZ
use with SID 1000 1500 mm (39.4" 59") without limitation of movement

Rev. 2
5000 (16.4 ft)

2350 (7.7 ft) 2650 (8.7 ft)
= =
(*)
200 A
(7.87")
C
**
3500 (11.5 ft)

200
(7.87")
1000 (3.281 ft)
D
**
(*) Minimum distance between standard floor fixing plate and wall with cabinets in
position A (inside the Apollo EZ tilting area) = 800 mm (31.5")
Minimum distance between standard floor fixing plate and wall with cabinets in
position B (outside the Apollo EZ tilting area) = 600 mm (23.6")
Figures 5-5b: Minimum dimensions for Apollo EZ
use with SID 1100 1800 mm (43.3" 70.9") without limitation of movement
The floor conduit (Figure 5-5) must have the following requirements:
• C : advised section = 20x10 cm (7.9"x3.9") / manhole - cabinet maximum distance = 9 m
(29.53 feet).
• D : advised section = 10 cm (3.9") / cabinet - console maximum distance = 14 m
(45.93 feet).
Note
For assembly entailing distances longer than those mentioned above (C and D)
electrical connection cables of a sufficient length must requested when ordering.
Warning
The electrical cabinet is fitted with two wheels so that the rear can be more easily
accessed during installation and maintenance.

Rev. 2
6000 (19.7 ft)

2230 (7.3 ft) 3220 (10.6 ft)
= =
(23.6")
600
200
(7.87")
**
3300 (10.8 ft)

SID min 1500 mm (59")
SID max 2000 mm (78.7")
1000 (3.281 ft)
**

Figure 5-6: Minimum dimensions for the correct
use of Apollo EZ with chest stand
Note
The installation example shown in Figure 5 6 is not represented for version with SID
1100 ÷ 1800 mm (43.3" ÷ 70.9").
This is because this version allows tests normally performed on chest stand.

Rev. 2
5.2 Electrical provisions
• POWER SUPPLY 380/400Vac 3 phase + Ground

415/480Vac 3 phase + Ground
• FREQUENCY 50/60Hz
• ABSORBED POWER (table only) 5kVA
• ABSORBED CURRENT (table only) 5 A @ 380/400 Vac
4 A @ 415/480 Vac
• APPARENT LINE RESISTANCE < 1 ohm
Note
Generally the power required for the fitting out of one complete X-ray room including
the Apollo EZ table equals 25-30kVA.
Warning
To avoid risk of electric shock, this equipment must only be connected to a supply
mains with protective earth.
Warning
The equipment can be connected in cascade, with X-ray generators complying with
requirements of IEC 60601-1 standard and approved by Villa Sistemi Medicali.
The cascade connection is used because, when the generator is powered OFF, the
table and the accessories connected to it are turned off as well. The wires of the
three-phase power supply between generator and table cabinet must have a
cross-section of at least 4.0 mm².
Check the generator Manual to make sure that the connection points are right for
the load and insulation values.
The general grounding must respond to the standards in force. If the grounding of
the equipment is not good enough, it might jeopardise the safety of the operator
and/or the malfunctioning of the electronic equipment.

Rev. 2
5.3 Adaptation to the mains voltage

The insulation and power feed transformer (T1) of the Apollo EZ table is fitted with two sets of
(R S T) primary winding power supply terminals.
One group is for connecting the 380V (or 415V) power supply, the other 400V (or 480V).
The equipment can be supplied with provision for a 380V / 400V or 415V / 480V connection
(see chapter 25 – Apollo EZ Power Supply diagram). This pre-disposition must be specified on
ordering and will be incorporated in the factory before shipment.
Before powering up the equipment, make sure that the mains voltage corresponds with the
predisposition of the equipment by checking that:
• the rating plate shows the right voltage (the position of the rating plate is described in
section 3.1)
• the connection of the primary of the insulation transformer and T1 power supply
corresponds with the mains voltage.
5.4 Environmental conditions

cond itions
The data in section 4.1 must be complied with for the environmental operating and
transport/storage conditions.

Rev. 2

Service Manual – Installation
Rev. 2
6 INSTALLATION
Warning
During the mechanical installation of the equipment and the electrical connection
described below, the safety regulations in force must be respected and the
precautions described below must be taken:
• wear accident prevention clothing (boots, gloves, goggles when necessary)
• always work in conditions of utmost safety and avoid carrying out procedures
that put you or others at risk
• make sure that no electricity is supplied to the equipment unless the installation
is completed or said electricity is required for installation purposes.
• when the unit is ready to be powered up and while the installation is in the final
phases of completion, make sure the power supply is cut off by means of a
switch that is not on the equipment before accessing any of the parts that can
be a danger.
For delivery, handling and assembly purposes, the machine is broken down into units that must
be put together:
 Base with main beam and column (Assembly 1)

 Tube and collimator support arm (Assembly 2)
 Spot Film Device (Assembly 3)
 Left-
Left - and right-
right - hand tabletop support arm (Assembly 4)
 Tabletop (Assembly 5)
Assemble the units by following the instructions below.

Rev. 2
6.1 Base positioning

posi tioning with beam and column
The base assembly including main beam and column is shipped fixed to the pallet as in Figure
6-1.
Warning
Before positioning the assembly on the anchorage plate, check that this is flat with
respect to both axes.
Note
The operations described below require the use of a transpallet.
1. Remove the cardboard packaging.

2. Remove the wooden beams "A
A " (Figure 6-1) holding the pallets together.
3. Remove bolts holding the base assembly to the pallets.
Figure 6-1

Rev. 2
4. Positioning the transpallet beneath the 2 side pallets, lift the base assembly and remove
the central pallets (Figure 6-2). Lower the transpallet.
Figure 6-2
5. Remove the two red brackets "F F " (Figure 6-2) anchored with the base to the side pallets
and keep the 5 wooden blocks and 4 spacers that will be used subsequently to position
the group on the ground. Place the transpallet centrally under the base assembly and lift it
to free the two side pallets.

Rev. 2
6. Position 4 wooden blocks on the 4 corners of the base (Figure 6-3); lower the transpallet.
Reassemble the 2 red brackets "F
F " fastening them to the base with the supplied M16x20
screws.
Wooden blocks
Figure 6-3
7. Referring to Figure 6-4, lift the base assembly and reposition the blocks (2 on the feet
side and 1 centrally on the head end) so that the transpallet can be introduced
longitudinally from the head end.
Central block
Figure 6-4

Rev. 2
8. Extract the transpallet and position it at the head end (Figure 6-5), inserting it as much as
possible below the base. Levering, lift the assembly enough to remove the wooden blocks.
Lower the transpallet.
Figure 6-5
9. Paying the utmost attention during transport, take the base assembly into the room in
correspondence with the fixing plate, aligning the base-plate fixing holes as much as
possible.
10. Reposition the 3 blocks as in Figure 6-4. Lower the base assembly and remove the
transpallet.

Rev. 2
11. Position the remaining 2 wooden blocks between the forks of the transpallet and the red
bracket (Figure 6-6). Lift the base assembly enough to remove the head side block
replacing it with 2 wooden spacers. Gently lower the assembly until it rests on the
spacers. Repeat the operation to remove the feet side blocks, replacing them with the 2
remaining spacers.
W o o d e n b lo c k s
W o o d e n s p a c e rs
Figure 6-6
12. Repeat the steps described in the previous section, removing one spacer at a time, until
the machine rests on the anchor plate.
13. Check that the holes in the base assembly line up perfectly with those in the anchorage
plate. If it is necessary, move the base assembly to align the fixing holes, use the
transpallet.
14. Remove the red plates "F

F " (Figure 6-2) and fasten the base to the anchor plate.
15. Close the holes not used with the supplied white cups.

Rev. 2
6.2 Tube supporting arm assembly

1. Remove the front plate from the column profile.
2. Move the tube support arm towards the top of the column and, at the same time, position
the front plate in such a way that the nine fixing holes on the parts to assemble (front
plate - tube support arm - column section) are aligned (Figure 6-7).
3. Make sure that the tube support arm is aligned properly with the column before tightening
the fixing screws.
4. Attach the 0° position microswitch to the front of the tube arm adjusting it so that it only
intervenes when the tube rotation pin reaches the 0° position.
C o lu m n
s e c tio n
T u b e
s u p p o rt a rm
F ro n t
p la te
M ic r o 0 °
Figure 6-7

Rev. 2
6.3 Spot Film Device assembly
Warning
A plate is provided with the Spot Film Device. This must be assembled with the four
Spot Film Device support wheels and it will constitute equipment necessary for the
installation of the image intensifier (paragraph 6.6).
The Spot Film Device is fitted on the relevant adjustable supports and fitted with wheels to
make it easier to move and position.
1. Position the Spot Film Device assembly mounted on the transport pallet, near the
machine.
2. Free the four Spot Film Device supports from the safety blocks fixing them to the
transport pallet.
3. Remove the Spot Film Device from the pallet being careful to pay the utmost attention
not to damage it.
4. Remove all Spot Film Device fixing screws, the two safety rods holding the inclination
motor support on the end wall and remove the protection of the inclination potentiometer
(Figure 6-8). Remove the two cover hooks (one on each side) from the Spot Film Device
(Figure 6-9) to permit positioning.
Safety
rod
Protection of the
inclination potmeter
Safety
rod
Figure 6-8

Rev. 2
5. Position the Spot Film Device assembly near the end wall and make sure that it is possible
to align the fixing holes on the shoulders and on the inclination motor support. Should it be
necessary to raise or lower the Spot Film Device to align the fixing holes, act on the
adjustable supports taking care not to force the Spot Film Device onto the inclination
motor's connections (Figure 6-9).
6. Once the alignment of the holes on both the fixing shoulders has been checked, it is
possible to fix, without tightening, the Spot Film Device assembly with the twenty-two
bolts supplied (eleven bolts per side).
If the Spot Film Device is imagined as a plane, it must be at right angles to the end wall
where it is fixed. Check that the two elements are at right angles to each other using a
spirit level. If it is necessary to make an adjustment to obtain the perfect right angles
between the Spot Film Device and the end wall, adjust the adjustable supports of the Spot
Film Device until the required position is obtained (Figure 6-9).
7. Insert the two centring pins into the holes (Figure 6-9), one for each side, making sure
that the threaded portion is accessible from outside and then tighten the twenty-two
screws. Reassemble the two cover hooks removed in point "4".
Centering
pin
90°
Top hook
Figure 6-9
8. Remove the four Spot Film Device assembly telescopic supports.

Rev. 2
9. Carry out the Spot Film Device wiring provided on the right-hand side of the end wall.
The wiring must be routed using the relevant cable clips to be found on the right-hand
wall of the Spot Film Device. The wires must be routed in such a way that they are
parallel to and not on top of each other (Figure 6-10).
Cable X16, fastened to a fixing plate, must be housed on the right wall of the Spot Film
Device interfacing with the flat cable (X16) pre-arranged during manufacture.
The following table is an aid in the identification of the wires and where they must be
connected (also see Figure 6-10).
Connector/Cable Point of connection
X101 Spot Film Device board A10

X16 Interface connector X16
Ground cable N° 8 A10 board fixing plate
A.E.C. chamber cable A.E.C. chamber cable
X68
X14
X19 X44
X101 X16 Cable clip
Ground cable
Figure 6-10

Rev. 2
Note
The automatic exposimeter device is an optional extra and consequently the A.E.C.
chamber cable is only present when the automatic exposimeter chamber is fitted to
the Spot Film Device.
10. Position the front panel of the Spot Film Device and fix it with the hinge on the left-hand
wall.
Connect the free end of the flat cable (X16) to the Table Side Operation board A8.
Loosen the fixing screws of the hinge on the Spot Film Device's left-hand wall; shut the
panel and do up the bolts on both sides (Figure 6-11).
X16
Figure 6-11

Rev. 2
6.4 Left and right hand tabletop support arm assembly

The tabletop support arms are different from each other with regard to the table fixing pin
position and the reference lines for fixing the respective belts. For this reason there are two
labels indicating the left-hand and right-hand arms.
Note
Both the tabletop support arms are fitted with blocking bolts for the transport.
Remove these blocks only after the arms have been assembled, the relative belts
have been tensioned and before fitting the tabletop and moving the arms.
Right-hand arm assembly (Figure 6-12):

1. Remove the beam side protection used for transport purposes.
2. Remove the small plate from the beams.
3. Loosen the three external attachment fixing bolts.
4. Place the arm into its seat in such a way as to allow the assembly of the belt on the
relative pulleys, following the route indicated in the figure. Check that the timing reference
lines marked above the belts of the arm and the co-ordinator correspond; otherwise
correct the position of the belt of the arm.
5. Position the arm in such a way as to be able to screw up the small plate removed at point
"2" using the three bolts. At this point the belt is properly tensioned.
Belt aligment
reference
Arm belt
Coordination
belt
Outside support
Small plate Beam side

protection
Figure 6-12

Rev. 2
6. Do up all the six arm blocking bolts.

7. Remove the blocking bolts used to immobilise the arm during transport.
For the assembly of the left-hand arm proceed as for the assembly of the right-hand arm,
considering that thare are not any belts.

Rev. 2
6.4.1 Anti
Anti-- entrapment device assembly
assem bly (only for 2 way tabletop
version)
1. Assemble the anti-entrapment under the foot side arm using the 5 relevant screws
already present on the arm, positioning the fixing plates as shown in Figure 6-13: the
longer one internal to the beam frame, the smaller one external.
Fix the longer plate with the two related screws.
2. Connect the cable X1 coming from the anti-entrapment arm to the relevant connector
located under the beam frame.
3. Mount the cover and verify if the anti-entrapment device works properly.
Longer fixing plate
Smaller fixing plate
Figure 6-13

Rev. 2
6.5 Equipment cable connection

The equipment is partially wired at the factory, the missing cables are supplied separately;
these must be wired on the machine as described below.
Note
The cable chains "A" and "B" (Figure 6-14) are made so that they can be opened in
order to introduce the cables. Pay attention to the location of the individual covers,
as they are not all alike they must be correctly repositioned when the chain is closed.
Only the machine cables can be arranged at this stage to allow the power supply to
the table and assist the remaining installation phases, or the system cables can be
wired (high voltage cables, anode etc.); this is performed at the installer's discretion. If
it is decided to wire the system cables, refer to paragraph 6.7 for the installation of
the tube-collimator assembly.
Figure 6-14
1. Fix chain "B" to the upper fixing bracket.

Rev. 2
Note
To easily identify the end to be attached to upper support, the following occurs: a
code is printed on the outside of the links, the upper part has a link with code
157.150.100.1, the next have code 158.150.100.1.
The end that is fastened to the lower fastening has links with code 157.150.100.1.
2. To avoid intertwining cables, the cable chains should be positioned as shown in Figure
6-14.
House the group of cables leaving chain "A" in chain"B". Some cables are slightly shorter
that others. The shorter ones will be connected to the base connectors board A11, the
longer ones will be connected in the electric cabinet of the table and generator if it has
also been decided to wire the system cables.
3. Before proceeding, the cable chain "B" must be positioned as in Figure 6-15.
4. The cable chains should not be closed at this point but some covers can be fitted to hold
the cables inside. Connect cables X20, X46, X75, X77, X88, X96, X97 and X98 to the base
connectors board A11 (Figure 6-16), passing them through socket "C" (Figure 6-15). The
base connectors board is provided with protection against dust, which should be removed
to allow the cable connections and then reassembled. Connect the ground cables 5, 7, 8, 9
to the ground bar (W2) in the base (Figure 6-17).
B C
Figure 6-15

Rev. 2
5. Connect the ground cable No. 10 between the ground bar (W2) on the machine base unit
and the ground bar (W1) in the cabinet.
6. Connect all cables exiting from socket "C" and from the chain "B" to the equipment
cabinet: X68, X19, X14, X16, X44, X101, X20, X46, X99.5, X99.6, X74, X99.1, X99.2, X105, X4,
X8A, X70, X71, X72 (4 way tabletop – optional), X73, 10, E2, E4, E1, E3 (4 way tabletop –
optional), X8 and Ethernet as indicated in the following table (see also Figure 6-17).
7. Connect the foot control (cable X41) to the touch screen.
8. Connect the power cable to the R-S-T terminals on the insulation transformer inside the
cabinet; connect the ground cable to the ground bar (W1) in the cabinet.
Note
The power supply cable must be anchored to the cabinet frame with a wrapper to
avoid it from being accidentally removed.
9. Connect the system cables to the rest of the accessories if you have decided to proceed
with wiring during the procedures described above.
Note
To avoid insurgence of an alarm condition at switch ON it is necessary to install the
collimator (see paragraph 6.7) and connect it by cables X4 and X8A.
The unit can now be switched ON and the movements performed.

Rev. 2
Table side Cabinet side

Location on the Table Location on the Cabinet Description
cable ID cable ID
Spot Film Device
X34
motor cable
Spot Film Device
X35
motor cable
Spot Film Device
X36
motor cable
Spot Film Device board A10 X68 Spot Film Device activation board A4
Spot Film Device
X37
motor cable
Spot Film Device
X38
motor cable
Spot Film Device
X39
motor cable
Spot Film Device
Spot Film Device board A10 X19 X19 Input board A2
potentiometer cable
Spot Film Device board A10 X14 X14 Input board A2 Spot Film Device cable
Table Side Operation board A8 X16 X16 Input board A2 Table Side Operation cable
Spot Film Device 24Vac

Spot Film Device board A10 X44 X44 Cabinet connector board A12
power supply cable

Service Manual - Installation
Rev. 2

cable ID cable ID
X0.10 Terminal block X0.10

Spot Film Device board A10 X101 Emergency stop button cable
Base unit connector board A11 X20 X20 Input board A2 Machine potentiometer cable
Base unit connector board A11 X46 X46 Cabinet connector board A12 Board connection cable X46
X99.5 X0.1 Terminal block X0.1

Angulation connector board A13 SID motor cable
X99.6 X0.2 Terminal block X0.2

Angulation connector board A13 X74 Emergency micro switch cable
X99.1 X48.1
Angulation connector board A13 Cabinet connector board A12 Compressor motor cable
X99.2 X48.2
Angulation connector board A13 X105 X105 Cabinet connector board A12 Board connection cable

Rev. 2

cable ID cable ID
Collimator X4 X4 Cabinet connector board A12 Collimator cable
Collimator
(RJ45) (RJ45)
(RJ4 5) HUB Ethernet cable
(camera live – if present)
Collimator ( DB9)
DB9 ) X8A CPU PCB A1 CANBus cable
Intercom microphone X5 X5 Cabinet connector PCB A12 Intercom microphone cable
Tilting motor
Tilting motor X70 Inverter box
power supply cable
Angulation motor
Angulation motor X71 Inverter box
power supply cable
Longitudinal tabletop motor
Longitudinal tabletop motor (Optional) X72 Inverter box
power supply cable
Scan motor
Scan motor X73 Inverter box
power supply cable
Base ground bar (W2) 10 10 Cabinet ground bar (W1) Ground cable No. 10
Angulation motor
Angulation motor E2 Terminal block X0.E2
grounf cable
Scan motor
Scan motor E4 Terminal block X0.E4
ground cable

Service Manual - Installation
Rev. 2

Location on
o n the Table Location on the Cabinet Description
cable ID cable ID
Tilting motor
Tilting motor E1 Terminal block X0.E1
ground cable
Longitudinal tabletop motor
Longitudinal tabletop motor (Optional) E3 Terminal block X0.E3
ground cable
X8 X2/X3 Cabinet connector PCB A12
HUB
Touch screen – CPU PCB A14 (RJ45) Touch screen
(with camera live)
(RJ45)
CPU PCB A1
J1
(without camera live)

Rev. 2

Rev. 2
ANGULATION CONNECTOR PCB - A13
BASE UNIT CONNECTOR PCB - A11
X96
X20
2 1
1
1
X75
1
4
1 2
X83
3
V1
X77
1
4
1 2
X84
X92
2
1
3
X78
1
V2
4
1 2
X88
X81
X93
3
1
2
2
1
X46
X97
X98
1
1
Figure 6-16: Connector points diagram for equipment connector board

Rev. 2
HARDWARE SINGLE FAULT

PCB - A27
HUB ETHERNET
X20 X19 X14 X16
8 9
X34
X8A X35
X70, X71,
X72, X73
J1 X36
X39
X38
10
X37 (to the cabinet)
R, S, T X46
CABINET X2 5
GROUND ROD (W1) X3 9
X105
7
8
X48
X44
X4 10
CABINET CONNECTOR BOARD - A12
BASE UNIT
GROUND ROD (W2)
TERMINAL BLOCK X0
X42 X41 X8 (RJ45)
X0.11 X0.10 X0.6 X0.5 X0.2 X0.1 E4 E3 E2 E1
Figure 6-17: Grounding and cables connection points layout

Rev. 2
6.6 Image intensifier installation
Note
Assemble the I.I. trolley with the four wheels of the Spot Film Device using the
supplied nuts.
For 12" I.I., make the trolley as shown in .
Figure 6-18
For 9" I.I., make the trolley adding the elevation plate as shown in .
Figure 6-19

Rev. 2
6.6.1 Image Intensifier (I.I.) assembly
1. Place the I.I. on the trolley. Position the scan in the centre and tilt the remote-controlled
table at an angle that allows the positioning of the I.I. below the Spot Film Device. Bring
the I.I. close to the table and position it so that the I.I. feeder is towards the base of the
machine.
2. Using the tilting command, move the table so that the fixing holes of the I.I. coincide with
the ones on plates already mounted inside the Spot Film Device. Proceed with caution
from this point to avoid damaging the I.I.; move the table bit by bit correcting the position
of the I.I.
Figure 6-20
3. Fix the I.I. to the plate with the supplied screws and tighten them.

Rev. 2
4. Check the crosswise and longitudinal alignment between the Spot Film Device and the I.I.
If realignment between the two parts is necessary, loosen screws "A" (Figure 6-21) on
both sides to obtain the crosswise movement of the I.I. in relation to the Spot Film Device
or screws "B" (Figure 6-21) for the longitudinal movement; tighten the screws once the
desired position is achieved.
B
Figure 6-21
5. Perform the wiring of the I.I. cables and the angulation motor cables on the left side of the
Spot Film Device's base wall using the appropriate cable clip (Figure 6-22). The cables
must be wired so they pass "parallel" together, following the route of the cables already
present in the machine.
Cable clip
Figure 6-22

Rev. 2
6.7 Tube - Collimator assembly
Note
International regulations require that the total filtration of the X-ray beam must be
greater than 2.5 mm Al.eq.
Ralco model collimators have a filtration of 1.0 mm Al.eq.
Considering the inherent filtration of the X-ray tube, indicated on the related
nameplate, add the necessary filtration using aluminum disks supplied with the tube
or collimator kit; these disks can be inserted in the seat of the X-ray output window.
Note
The collimator kit comprises:
• collimator fixing cone H=17 mm (0.7")
• additional filters of 0.5 mm Al
• collimator assembly spacers of 1.5 mm (0.06") and 3 mm (0.1")
• fixing screws 6x25 and 6x30.
1. Position the tube support in its fixing pin making sure to correctly connect the two release
levers to rotate the tube (Figure 6-23). Insert the support fixing screw on the pin and
secure in the most comfortable position for mounting the tube.
Fastening
pin
Support
screw
Release
levers
Tube
support
Figure 6-23

Rev. 2
2. Position the tube on the support and at the same time apply the collimator fastening cone
(Figure 6-24) with the reference "F" positioned in front side. When doing this take into
account the distance between the focus of the tube and the cone/collimator supporting
surface; to maintain a proper correspondence between the X-ray field and the collimator
light field the distance must be 80±1 mm (3.15"±0.04"). To do this, the collimator kit's
spacers have to be used (refer to the technical data that comes with the X-ray tube to
determine the point of focus). Before fastening cone with the screws, position X-ray tube
and collimator parallel to tube support, considering that the choice of screw length is
determined by the number of spacers used.
Note
For detailed information about collimator installation, refer to the relevant Manual
provided as electronic copy inside the collimator box.
Warning
A wrong choice of screw length may lead to inadequate fixing of the X-ray assembly
if short screws are used or damage the X-ray tube if too long screws are used.
3. Installa the collimator on the cone using the four fastening hooks counting the number of
turns so that each screws is adjusted with the same distance. This operation permit to
center mechanically collimator with X-ray tube output window.
Note
To safely mount the collimator to the X-ray tube, refer to the Ralco Safety
Instructions or to the relevant Manual provided as electronic copy inside the
collimator box.
X-ray tube
Spacer
Collimator
fastening cone
Collimator
Figure 6-24

Rev. 2
4. Connect X45 cable inside the collimator.

The collimator cable length is calculated to permit equipment servicing even when the
collimator is out of beam. With the group at 0° rotation, the corresponding micro safety
switch inside the arm must be in n.a. condition.
5. Connect the cables inside the arm (Figure 6-25).
The cables are to be housed so that the tube can rotate without them being damaged. The
necessary excess to allow this remains hidden inside the arm when the upper cover is
mounted. Make sure the tube 0° safety switch is anchored to the arm to be independent
from the rest of the cables. These should be as independent as possible from any
fasteners (limit the use of clips to a minimum) to avoid damage during rotation of the tube.
We recommend using only the mounting points provided on the machine.
Figure 6-25
6. After wiring inside the tube arm and having verified its effectiveness after checking the
rotation of the tube, the arm cover is mounted (Figure 6-26 - 4 screws provided on the
column profile + 8 screws on the arm). To perform this operation, increase the SID and
remove the chain and its right side support (Figure 6-27) allowing access to the column
profile screws.
Figure 6-26

Rev. 2
7. Only then proceed to wire the cables inside the column.

8. Open the chain, previously removed, and insert all the cables from the tube-collimator
assembly so that they run parallel to each other.
9. Close and reassemble the chain to the supports and then the column so that the cables
come out on the left side, to the rear with respect to chain (Figure 6-27).
10. Secure the cables at the fixing points provided on the column and, following the route of
the cables already in the machine, put them into the rear chains.
Chain support
Figure 6-27

Rev. 2

Rev. 2
6.8 Covers assembly

Referring to the following Figures, fit the covers once installation is complete.
Assemble the compressor arm.

Rev. 2

Rev. 2
(*)
(*)
(*) Covers supplied only with 4 way tabletop
Figure 6-28: Apollo EZ SID 1000 ÷ 1500 mm (39.4" ÷ 59") cover installation diagram (front view)

Rev. 2
Figura 6-29: Apollo EZ SID 1000 ÷ 1500 mm (39.4" ÷ 59") cover installation diagram (rear view)

Rev. 2
(*)
(*)
(*) Covers supplied only with 4 way tabletop
Figure 6-30: Apollo EZ SID 1100 ÷ 1800 mm (43.3" ÷ 70.9") cover installation diagram (front view)

Rev. 2
Figure 6-31: Apollo EZ SID 1100 ÷ 1800 mm (43.3" ÷ 70.9") cover installation diagram (rear view)

Rev. 2
6.9 Tabletop assembly
6.9.1 2 way tabletop assembly
Lock the tabletop to the fixing plates "A" by the eight screws supplied with the arms (Figure
6-32).
Warning
Verify the presence of the footrest safety screws "C" on tabletop footside (both side).
If removed, they may have effect on patient safety.
Warning
In case the optional shoulder rest (Figure 3-1) is present, apply the included labels
following the instruction supplied with the option.
Footrest safety
screw "C"
Fixing plates "A"
Figure 6-32

Rev. 2
6.9.2 4 way tabletop assembly
Warning
This operation requires the presence of at least 3 people.
1. Position the tabletop close to the two support arms with the feet side drive assembly.
Figure 6-33
2. Lay the tabletop on the support arm, feet side, and slide it until the motor unit engages
the side fixing plates on the arm (Figure 6-34).

Rev. 2
3. Insert the 4 fixing screws tabletop – feet side arm side plates, without tightening. Insert
the 3 lower fixing screws, without tightening.
Anti-entrapment
PCB - A23
Side fixing plates
Figure 6-34: Tabletop feet side
4. Align the 4 fixing screws, head side, sliding the arm and inserting them.
Figura 6-35: Tabletop head side

Rev. 2
5. Position the tabletop parallel with the beam. Tighten first the 3 lower screws, feet side
(Figure 6-34), then tighten the 4 fixing screws, head side (Figura 6-35) and then tighten
the 4 fixing screws tabletop - feet side arm side plates (Figure 6-34).
6. Connect the motor cables (X74, X78, X84, E3) to the relevant ones caming from the chain.
7. Connect the anti-entrapment cables (X1, X2, X3) to the relevant connectors on the Anti-
entrapment PCB A23 (Figure 6-34).
Warning
Verify the presence of the footrest safety screws "C" on tabletop footside (Figure 6
32 - both side).
If removed, they may have effect on patient safety.
Warning
In case the optional shoulder rest (Figure 3-1) is present, apply the included labels
following the instruction supplied with the option.

Rev. 2
6.10 Mobile patient loading step (optional) assembly

Referring to the following Figures, assemble the mobile patient loading step and fit it to the
table base using two M8x25 bolt and the relevant washers.
The "Spacer" (Figure 6-37), always supplied, must be used only in case of installation with floor
top plate.
M8x25 screws
Figure 6-36: Installation with standard floor fixing plate
Spacer
M8x50 screws
Figure 6-37: Installation with floor top plate

Rev. 2
6.11 DAP camera mount

For DAP camera assembling procedure, please refer to the collimator Manual CD present in the
collimator box.

Rev. 2
6.12 Final Checks

Once the mechanical installation is complete, the Apollo EZ table must be configured and its
functionality tested.
To do so, proceed as follows:
• Introduce the dimensional data of the room (see section 11.1)
• Introduce the configuration data (see section 11.1)
• Take the values related to the actual speed of the movements (see section 11.1); this
operation is essential for installation with a frequency of 60 Hz
• Test the functionality of all movements for the different operation modes (Spot Film
Device mode, Tomography and Digital when available) and check the anti-collision safety
devices
• After having calibrated the X-ray tube, centre the X-ray tube - Collimator - Spot Film
Device - I.I. (see chapter 19)
• Verify that the position of the presser is adjusted correctly for the type of cassette used.
This should exert pressure on the cassette in order to hold it even with the table in an
upright position, without excessive pressure such to make the ejection movement of the
cassette critical. The control must be performed with at least sizes 18x24 (8 "x10") and
35x43 (14"x17").
If the presser adjustment were not optimum, loosen the 6 fixing screws and allow the
presser spring "A" (Figure 6-38) to slide in the desired direction keeping it parallel to the
supporting surface.

Rev. 2
Pusher plate "A"
Figure 6-38
• Check the centring made for the various cassette sizes (see chapter 19); if necessary
correct any inaccuracies.
Note
At the end of installation, before using the system with patients, it is necessary to
perform electrical safety test according to local rules.
Note
The Service Engineer has to take special care for all what concerns electrical safety
of the device and must make sure of restoring all provisions for electrical safety
which may be affected during a service intervention and to solicit the customer to
have the electrical safety tests repeated every time the intervention has caused the
replacement of important parts or the intervention has significantly affected safety
provisions of the device.

Service Manual – The functioning logic of the table
Rev. 2
7 THE FUNCTIONING LOGIC OF THE TABLE

The Apollo EZ table has been designed with an electronic leading-edge management and
control circuit.
The circuit is based on boards called:
• A1 "CPU" board
• A2 "Input " board
• A3 "Output" board
• A4 "Spot Film Device Motor Driver"
Drive r" board for Spot Film Device motors
• A14 "Touch Screen" board
It is easy to deduce what the function of the PCB’s listed above is from their names and they
are situated in the electrical cabinet with exception of the touch screen PCB.
Some information about the characteristics of the system's CPU that could come in useful, is
given below.
The "touch screen" A14 PCB is fitted with two µprocessor, both connected with the cabinet
CPU via Ethernet.
The first µprocessor, model Microchip PIC, is used to decode the state of the joystick and send
this information to the cabinet CPU.
The second µprocessor, model Freescale MCF 5329, is used to manage the graphic layout on
LCD and receive the command from the touch layer to transmit to cabinet CPU.
The A1 "CPU" PCB is equipped with a MCU 32B ARM Cortex-M4 (STM32F427IIT6) processor
the job of which is to act as main processor with its 2Mb Flash on board.
All the required memory devices, except the EEPROM containing the equipment set up data,
are available on Microcontroller chip. Also the need of storing variables/error logs is resolved by
using the internal flash memory (32k byte) of the Microcontroller, organized in 2 x 16 kB
sectors (for update and backup).
The incorporated program manages the entire functioning logic of the equipment including, as
said before, dialoguing with the touch screen.
There is also an AT89C2051 processor on the CPU that functions as a Supervisor

microprocessor with an internal eprom containing the supervision and serial and parallel control
program for the channels responsible for the movements.
The release of the equipment management software, rack side and console side, is shown on
the touch screen, SETUP page, in the bottom left corner (see Figure 9-1).

Rev. 2
7.1 Functioning
Functionin g sequences
7.1.1 Powering up and initialisation sequence
On powering up the electronics of the CPU, the Touch Screen, the Input board and part of the
Output board is powered through the T2 transformer.
At this point the main processor and the controller begin to perform the checks that can make
sure all the conditions are regular.
If that is the case, both the main processor and the controller activate the respective "ready"
relay after an interval of three seconds.
The open contacts of these two relays are connected in series.
One phase of the coil of the power remote switch K1L is interrupted by the series of these two
relays.
When they are activated, they therefore permit the energising of the K1L that, through the
closure of its contacts, will power the table's power circuits.
At this point, the procedure for the initialisation of the Spot Film Device begins the purpose of
which is to move the inside parts of the Spot Film Device to the default positions.
While this is happening, i.e. from the time the power circuits have been powered up and when
the parts of the Spot Film Device have reached the positions defined, all the movements of the
table are disabled and the touch screen shows the message:
"Loading. Please wait…"
When the initialisation procedure is successfully completed, the touch screen changes and
shows the data for the active mode.
All the table movements and the functions will, at this point, be enabled.

Rev. 2
7.1.2 Activation sequence for a movement
When a joystick, enabled to activate a movement is pressed, 2 microswitches are activated

simultaneously.
The first sends the movement activation signal, along the CAN BUS line, from the control
panel to the main board.
The second opens the single fault circuit (SF) that is controlled either from the main processor
or the controller.
If all the conditions are in order, the processor will activate the circuits that control the engines.
Once the feedback potentiometer is launched it informs the processor about the position and
speed of the movement itself.
In order to indicate the working conditions, all the outputs are fitted with a signalling led that
lights up when an output, whether a movement output or a controlling output for an external
accessory, is active.
As a block diagram of the sequences described above, the one below is useful for explaining the
functioning logic in even clearer terms.

Rev. 2
BLOCK DIAGRAM BLOCK DIAGRAM

POWERING UP SEQUENCE SIMPLE MOVEMENT
Table power up Movement Joystick NO

Electronics power activation
→
supply SF OK
T2 ON YES ↓
Send SF circuit
Hardware Opening NO
Check NO Signalling Data serial →
electronics OK → ALARMS SF OK
YES YES ↓
↓ Movement or logic
3 sec. NO
output activation
READY relay ON →
SF OK
K1L ON
YES ↓
HW power activation NO READY
REA DY relay
Hardware electronics Turning off SF OK → power down
NO
check READY YES ↓ Signalling
→ ALARMS
OK relay
YES Motor movement NO
↓ SF OK →
End of message YES ↓
"Loading" Potmeter feed back NO
SW table motor SF OK →
movement enabling
YES ↓
Joystick release
output power down NO
Movement stop →
SF reclosure SF OK

Rev. 2
7.2 Fault Conditions

Three different anomaly conditions can arise while the equipment is in operation:
• condition fault
• operating fault
• power circuit faults.
These three different situations cause the consequences that are analysed below.
7.2.1 Generation of a condition alarm
While the equipment is in operation a fault can occur in the table or one of the accessories
connected to it.
If this fault does not compromise the functioning of the system (Example: the generator is not
"ready" within the set time), a few movements are disabled by the SW and the relative alarm
message is displayed on the touch screen accompanied by an intermittent "beep".
To remove the alarm and re-enable all the movements it will be necessary to push the "RESET"
key twice.
The first time silences the "beep", the second resets the alarm and restores the normal
conditions.
7.2.2 Generation of an operating

o perating alarm
If the processor recognises an abnormal situation caused by the SF control or by other

elements interacting with the processor, that could seriously compromise the functioning of the
equipment, the READY relays are deenergised and a flashing alarm appears on the control
panel.
This condition cannot be reset as it is a serious fault.
A search must be made to see what the cause of this effect is.
To remove the alarm and re-enable the movements the equipment must be turned off.

Rev. 2
7.2.3 Generation of an alarm caused by the power circuit
If a movement of the table or the Spot Film Device should for any reason go over the SW run
determined by the potentiometer, an emergency end of run will be intercepted.
This will entail the turning off of the power remote switch K1L with the consequent opening of
the power control input (X15 pin 10).
This will mean the main processor will turn off the READY relays and the controller and
generate the alarm 080 on the touch screen.
It will therefore be necessary to turn off the equipment to remove the alarm situation.
After removing the cause of the failure, the powering up procedure after the power cutting out
must be followed in order to restore the normal operating conditions described in the relevant
chapter.
As a block diagram of the sequences described above, the one below is useful for explaining the
functioning logic in even clearer terms.

Rev. 2
CONDITION FUNCTIONAL POWER

PO WER
ALARM ALARM ALARM
Malfunction that is: Malfunction that is: Malfunction that is:

resettable - Single Fault Table emergency
- Component
Alarm Deenergising:
on touch screen Turning off K1L
(YELLOW square) READY relay
Input opening
Reset: Alarm X15 pin 10
- 1st beep OFF on touch screen
- 2nd alarm OFF (RED square): Alarm on touch screen
NON resettable (RED square):
Cause of NO 080
malfunction: → Turning off
removed equipment Turning off
YES ↓ equipment
Restore Troubleshooting
normal operating Troubleshooting
conditions

Rev. 2

Service Manual – IN/OUT interface connection
Rev. 2
8 IN/OUT INTERFACE CONNECTI

CON NECTION
NECTI ON
All the input and output signals towards the accessories such as: generator, TV chain etc. are
connected to the Input and Output boards by means of the X0 terminal clamp.
The hardware characteristics of these signals are listed below.
8.1 Output signals from

fr om the Apollo EZ table
The outputs shown below are dependent on an open collector circuit (ULN2803) NPN active at
0 V. No circuits with pull up resistance of over 30 Vdc with maximum current not exceeding
100 mA may be connected to these outputs.
A3 Output
Out put board Description
X27 pin 1 2nd tomographic speed set

X27 pin 14 3rd tomographic speed set
X27 pin 2 Request for fluoro
X27 pin 15 Exposure request
X27 pin 3 Preparation request
X27 pin 16 Request for second snap to be taken
X27 pin 4 1st tomographic speed set
X27 pin 17 4th tomographic speed set
X27 pin 5 7° tomography angle set
X27 pin 7 Rays ON without request
X27 pin 20 Man/auto fluoro Kv selection
X28 pin 5 Digital reconstruction

X28 pin 18 Request for fluoro
X28 pin 6 Exposure request
X28 pin 19 Request digital preparation
X28 pin 7 Angio step
X28 pin 20 Motion detection
X28 pin 8 Recursive filter x0 /
Additional collimator filter 2 mm Al
Additional collimator filter 1 mm Al + 0.1 mm Cu
Additional collimator filter 1 mm Al + 0.2 mm Cu

Rev. 2
The manual Kv fluoro driver output is dependent on an analogical circuit (TLC271) with a
voltage range from 1.8 Vdc to 6.5 Vdc. A max load of 5 mA can be applied.
A3 Output board Description
X27 pin 19 Man. fluoro Kv control analogue
The following outputs are part of an optoisolator circuit (LH1520) that must be polarised. The
maximum voltage and current applied must not exceed 25 Vac with 70 mA.
X0 Connector Description
28 X28 pin 3 Common for im. scan reverse circuit

26 X28 pin 4 Right/left image scan reverse
27 X28 pin 16 Up/Down image scan reverse
32 X28 pin 1 Common for Zoom I.I. circuit
31 X28 pin 15 Maximum Zoom (minimum field)
30 X27 pin 2 Medium zoom (medium field)
29 X28 pin 14 Minimum Zoom (maximum field)

Rev. 2
8.2 Input signals towards the Apollo EZ table

The inputs listed below are part of an open collector circuit (74HC245) NPN active at 0 V. This
circuit is made with pull-up resistors related to 24 Vdc. The typical absorption of these circuits
is equal to 10 mA max.
X0 Connector Description
12 X13 pin 1 Generator ready for rays

13 X13 pin 2 X-ray on
14 X13 pin 3 Digital work station
15 X13 pin 4 Spot Film Device workspace
16 X13 pin 5 Shelf safety
17 X13 pin 6 External safety barrier
18 X13 pin 7 Additional collimator filters out of position
19 X13 pin 8 Cassette presence switch ("Sensing" chest stand)

Rev. 2

Service Manual – Access technique and description of the data groups
Rev. 2
9 ACCESS TECHNIQUE AND DESCRIPTION OF THE

DATA GROUPS
All configuration, operation and adjustment data, including the Checksum, re-calculated after
any data change, are stored in the EEprom.
After start-up, the Checksum is calculated and compared with the stored value. If the values
do not match, the alarm 090 is generated.
The data stored in the EEprom are sub-divided into "groups".
There can be up to 99 position "cells" inside each groups.
A storage position will therefore be identified by three digits:
0 00
↓ ↓
Number of the group Position of the cell
To access the read only function of data stored in these cells, position the switch of the group
of DIP-switches on the CPU at ON.
To edit and modify data in the cells, after activating the switches, it will be necessary to key in
an access code.
The table below lists different data groups together with correspondent DIP-switche
configuration and access codes to be keyed-in.
Warning
The Authorised Technician is recommended not to communicate these codes so that
non-authorised persons are prevented from entering the memory cells and changing
them, thereby causing the equipment to malfunction.
The version of the installed software, both rack side and console side is shown on the touch
screen, left bottom corner of the SETUP page (see next figure).

Rev. 2
cm Grid: 120
Mode
Ret.
0° 0° 100 0.0 SETUP
Beep on Keypress Orientation Division Selection

User Language
Yes No Table Monitor Auto Manual
USER-1 English
Units Collimator VDX Ready Mode
Preset position cm/kg inch/lbs Auto Manual RAD Fluoro
MODE-1 Error Reset Volume OPE
Auto Manual - + 90%

MODE-2 Volume PAT
Tomoscopy
Yes No - + 100%
MODE-3
Cassette Eject Volume MSG
Auto Manual - + 100%

FW CPU ver.: X.X.XX (DD-MM-YYYY)
SW TSC ver.: X.X.XX (DD-MM-YYYY)
Figure 9-1
where:
• F W CPU ver.
ver . = version of the rack software also shown on the rack Eprom label, plus
the release date
• SW TSC ver. = version of the touch screen software, plus the release date
For any signalling of a malfunction or request for technical help, always indicate the version of
the software on the equipment.

Rev. 2
The following table shows the DIP-switch combinations – access code and the functions of the
various groups.
DIP-
DIP -switch Code Group Subroutine
1 PWD0 101 Potentiometer adjustment
2 PWD1 201 Installation data
3 PWD0 301 PDI controlled motor setting data
4 PWD1 711 “time” setting -Reset alarm memory
1 + 2 PWD0 401 Equipment dimension setting
Run shutters and cassette
1 + 3 PWD1 701 Eeprom copying
1 + 4 751 Alarm history visualisation
2 + 3 PWD1 721 Spot Film Device and table life test
2 + 4 PWD1 731 Remote service function
3 + 4 PWD1 850 Equipment cycle and time display
1 + 2 + 4 Access codes setting
The above mentioned groups are divided into positions.

The function of the various positions inside the groups is shown below.
Group Position and function

Potentiometer adjustment From 101 to 132 setting of the maximum and
minimum of the various potentiometers
Installation data From 201 to 265 typical settings linked to the
installation and the equipment
PDI controlled motor setting data From 301 to 400 setting data for control of
motors with PDI function
“Time” setting 711 = Time and date display
Reset alarm memory 712 = Year setting
713 = Month setting
714 = Day setting
715 = Hour setting
716 = Minute setting
717 = Second setting
719 = Reset alarm memory
Equipment dimension setting From 401 to 686 dimension and run setting
Run shutters and cassette
Eeprom copying 701 = Copy from EEprom to RAM
702 = Copy from RAM to EEprom
Alarm history visualisation 751 = Position and alarm data display
Spot Film Device and table life test 721 = Life test choice
722 = SFD life test
723 = Table life test
Remote service function 731 = Remote service function
Equipment cycle and time display 850 = Cycle and time display

Rev. 2
The default values for the two access codes are:

PWD0 = 48859
PWD1 = 20090
Both access codes are customizable by following the steps below:

1. Turn off the equipment, turn switches 1, 2 and 4 in the DIP-switch assembly in the CPU
board to ON.
2. Turn on the equipment. The touch screen will show:
SERVICE KEYS MANAGEMENT Mode

SERVICE
SN: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Key 0 protected groups:

- 101: potentiometers limits Change Key 0...
- 301: axes parameters
- 401: machine parameters
Key 1 protected groups:

- 201: room data
- 701: EEPROM copy
- 711: RTC, USB saving, memory reset Change Key 1...
- 721: life cycles test
- 751: historical alarms reset
- 851: machine counters reset
Reset Keys...
Print Keys...
Change Key 0... Change Key 1...

3. Press key to modify the PWD0 code or press key to
modify the PWD1.
The procedure shall require you to enter, using the keypad, the current access code, the new
access code and the confirmation of the new access code.
The access code must be 5 decimal digits and the first digit must be different from 0.
Note
If it is necessary to restore the default access code, contact Villa Sistemi Medicali to
create a super-password for the single serial number.

Service Manual – Access and adjustment of group 100 data
Rev. 2
10 ACCESS AND ADJUSTMENT

ADJUSTMEN T OF GROUP 100 DATA
To access the data stored in group 100 the procedures described below must be followed.
 Reading data
1. Turn off the equipment, turn switch 1 in the DIP-switch assembly in the CPU board
to ON.
Mode
CELL SERVICE
Edit
369 -40.0 2090 / 4096
101: Angulation min (head side)
where:
369 = value presently in the memory
- 40.0° = position that the part has to reach corresponding to the value at
minimum
2090/ = current value of the potentiometers expressed on a scale with a
maximum value of 4096
101 = number of the cell
Angulation… = brief description of the function of the selected cell.

Rev. 2
3. By pressing the and scrolling keys it is possible to increase and decrease

the cells to be displayed, respectively.
CELL
The cell number can also be selected by pressing key and digit
the number of cell to be accessed on the displayed alphanumerical keyboard.
If no key is pressed within about 20 sec, the keyboard disappears.
 Data entry
1. Press on the area of the selected cell and hold it down for 1 sec; the display will show
a numerical keyboard asking to insert the access key:
Enter Key 1 2 3
4 5 6
ESC 7 8 9
C 0 -
.
Note
The key code is required only in case some data need to be changed and only once
each start-up.
2. Set the key code relative to this data group (see chapter 9).
ESC
3. Press key (Enter) to confirm or to exit; on the "insert address key" area,
the display will show the message:
<< KEY OK >>
that indicates that it is possible to access groups 100-300-400, thanks to the use of
the code that has just been keyed in, in function of which switches are positioned at
ON.
If the code keyed in is wrong, the following message appears on the screen, instead:
<< Wrong code: access denied >>
C
In this case, press key (Clear) on the numerical keyboard and digit again the
access code. Confirm with key (Enter).

Rev. 2
4. The display returns to the position of the previously selected cell and the
Edit
key will be displayed on the left of the screen.
Mode
CELL SERVICE
Edit
369 -40.0 2090 / 4096
101: Angulation min (head side)
It is now possible to change the set of the cells.

Rev. 2
10.1 Potentiometer
Potentiomete r adjustment
The Apollo EZ table bases the control of its movements on the feedback generated by the
potentiometers.
These potentiometers must therefore be adjusted, the reference value of the maximum and
end run voltages must be stored in the corresponding cells in the EEprom.
At this point it will be possible to edit the data of the cells making up this group.
It will also be possible to perform the movements for the adjustment of the potentiometers by
using the compressor movement joystick.
In this program, only this joystick is active (except for the calibration of the collimator
movement as described below).
If the joystick is pushed upwards, the direction of the set movement will be towards its
maximum and the potentiometer value shown on the display will increase.
If the joystick is pushed downwards, the direction of the movement will be the opposite,
towards its minimum, and the potentiometer value will decrease.
In this program the speed of the PDI movements are set permanently in the adjustment
software and cannot be modified.
The value of the potmeter corresponding to the current position is displayed in the first square
(blue area). After reaching the desired position, just store the current value into the EEprom by
Edit
pressing the key.
Warning
During the adjustment phase, the anticollision program is not active so, before
performing any movement, make sure that that there is no risk of collision during it.
Furthermore, since the software end runs are set in this program no stopping on
them is activated.
If the set run is exceed, the movement will hit the emergency switch causing the
equipment to stop.

Rev. 2
10.1.1 Cell data and list
The limits of the movements are set by default during the factory's predelivery testing of the
equipment.
These limits are shown on the display depending on the cell that is set.
It is possible to vary these limits by modifying the data in the cells of group 400, but in
practice this operation is never performed. In fact this modifies the functional characteristics of
the table.
Furthermore, in order to ensure maximum safety also in cases where there is a malfunction in
the movement electronics control, there are hardware emergency switches positioned in such a
way as to cut in when the software end run does not stop the movement. These positions
break the power supply to the hardware circuits (they determine the opening of the K1L
remote switch). Thus any modification of the run limits also entails the mechanical repositioning
of these switches.
In the table below the functions of group 100 cells are shown.
Joyst.direct
Cell Movement Value Movement direction Default.lim
.
101 Angulation LOW min Anticlockwise (head end) - 40.0°
40.0°
102 Angulation HIGH max Clockwise (feet side) +40.0°
+40.0°
4 way scan LOW Min Left (head end) - 665 mm
103
2 way scan LOW Min Left (head end) - 670 mm
4 way scan HIGH max Right (feet side) +515 mm
104
2 way scan HIGH max Right (feet side) +670 mm
105 Tilting -30 LOW min Anticlockwise head end - 30°
(-30)
106 Tilting +90 HIGH max Clockwise feet side (+90) +90°
107 Longitudinal tabletop LOW min Left head end - 600 mm
108 Longitudinal tabletop HIGH max Right feet end +600 mm
109 WB width cass. (*) LOW min CLOSED 140 mm
110 WB width cass. HIGH max OPEN 465 mm
111 WB height cass. LOW min CLOSED 140 mm
112 WB height cass. HIGH max OPEN 465 mm
SID (a) 1016 mm
113 LOW min Low
SID (b) 1106 mm
SID (a) 1516 mm
114 HIGH max High
SID (b) 1806 mm
115 Transversal tabletop LOW min Inside - 175 mm
116 Transversal tabletop HIGH max Outside +175 mm
(*) Cells 109 ÷ 112 refer to the potentiometers in the presence of chest stand (WB - Wall
Bucky) equipped "Sensing" cassette holder.
(a) Apollo EZ table with SID 1000 ÷ 1500 mm (39.4" ÷ 59")
(b) Apollo EZ table with SID 1100 ÷ 1800 mm (43.3" ÷ 70.9")

Rev. 2
Joyst.direct
Joyst.dir ect
Cell Movement Value Movement direction Default.lim
.
123 Compressor LOW/HIGH min Descent/Rise 1.5 kg
124 Compressor LOW/HIGH max Descent/Rise 15.5 kg
125 Grid 1 LOW min Park direction 000 mm
126 Grid 1 HIGH max Field direction 510 mm
127 Cassette close LOW min Closes 146 mm
128 Cassette close HIGH max Opens 463 mm
129 Optional LOW min Left (head end) - 65.0 mm
Cross subdivision
130 Optional HIGH max Right (feet side) +65.0 mm
Cross subdivision
131 Shutters LOW min Towards opening 000.0 mm
132 Shutters HIGH max Towards overlap (cross 455.0 mm
subdiv.)
133 Grid 2 LOW min Park direction 000 mm
134 Grid 2 HIGH max Field direction 510 mm
As said before, the default value that the movement must reach at the minimum and
maximum is shown on the display.
Once this position has been reached, the potentiometer must indicate a near value (a tolerance
of up to 100 units can be reached) as shown in the following table.
If not, release the potentiometer, reach the position required with the movement then turn the
potentiometer until reaching the indicated value.
Lock the potentiometer in position and store the value to memory.
Compliance with this value makes it possible to ensure that the potentiometer is not damaged
mechanically as a result of a position that leads to exceed its mechanical stop, and the
potentiometer is used in the central area, thus avoiding using the limits that often turn out to
be critical.
As far as the position to reach to carry out the adjustments of the up to and maximums, it will
be shown how to measure the value to reach, on the next few pages and in the descriptions.
In some cases, this measurement is different from what is shown on the display, as shown in
the last column of the proceeding table.

Rev. 2
This is because the indicated value is the result of software calculations having table points of
origin as a reference but, in some case, it is intricate and difficult to make these measurements
in practice.
This is why points other than those shown in the figures have been chosen.
Potentiomete Potentiomete
Cell Movement Movement direction
r direction r value
101 Angulation Decrease Anticlockwise (head end) approx.334
102 Angulation Increase Clockwise (feet side) approx.3762
4 way scan approx.117
103 Decrease Left (head end)
104 Increase Right (feet side)
105 Tilting Decrease Anticlockwise head end approx.250
(-30)
106 Tilting Increase Clockwise feet side (+90) approx.3900
107 Longitudinal tabletop Decrease Left head end approx.411
108 Longitudinal tabletop Increase Right feet end approx.3838
109 WB width cass Decrease
110 WB width cass Increase The relative data are based on the "Sensing"
111 WB height cass Decrease cassette holder used.
112 WB height cass Increase
SID (a) approx.341
113 Decrease Low
SID (b) approx.100
SID (a) approx.3754
114 Increase High
SID (b) approx.3980
Transversal tabletop approx.287
(2 way)
115 Decrease Inside
(4 way)
(2 way)
116 Increase Outside
(4 way)
(a) Apollo EZ table with SID 1000 ÷ 1500 mm (39.4" ÷ 59")

(b) Apollo EZ table with SID 1100 ÷ 1800 mm (43.3" ÷ 70.9")

Rev. 2
Potentiomete Potentiomete
Cell Movement Movement direction
r direction r value
123 Compressor Decrease Descent/Rise approx.1340
124 Compressor Increase Descent/Rise approx.2640
125 Grid 1 Decrease Park direction approx.205
126 Grid 1 Increase Field direction approx.3710
127 Cassette close Decrease Closes approx.360
128 Cassette close Increase Opens approx.3730
129 Optional Decrease Left (head end) approx.1430
Cross subdivision
130 Optional
Option al Increase Right (feet side) approx.2640
Cross subdivision
131 Shutters Decrease Towards opening approx.330
132 Shutters Increase Towards overlap (cross approx.3740
subdiv.)
133 Grid 2 Decrease Park direction approx.205
134 Grid 2 Increase Field direction approx.3710

Rev. 2
10.1.2 ANGULATION potentiometer adjustment (cells 101 – 102)
To carry out this adjustment, it is necessary to remove the covers of the scan group.
At this point, the Spot Film Device support plate can be seen showing the column tilting
reference marks.
The limits of the angulation are obtained by bringing the upper edge of the column to
correspond to reference lines on the Spot Film Device support.
With a level goniometer it will be possible to carry out a further check of the soundness of the
min and max positions reached.
Take the column towards the minimum (head side), select cell 101 and store to memory.
Repeat the operation for the maximum (feet side) and memorise in cell 102.
102
-40° +40°
Linee di
riferimento
Figure 10-1: ANGULATION potentiometer adjustment (cells 101 – 102)

Rev. 2
10.1.3 SCAN potentiometer adjustment (cells 103 – 104)
10.1.3.1 Version with 2 way tabletop
Before starting the adjustment of this movement, you must:

1. Move the table into a horizontal position. This ensures that when the scan is moved over
its full travel it does not create risks of collision between the II and the floor.
2. Remove the left-hand cover of the scan group.
3. Remove the main beam's left-hand side cover.
Move the scan towards the minimum position (head side) that must be found between the outer
left-hand limit of the main beam and the side of the Spot Film Device base plate. The point to be
reached is 57 mm (2.2").
(2.2")
Select cell 103 and memorise the minimum value.
Move the scan to the maximum position (feet side) and find the 1397 mm (55.0") measurement
among the same references used for the minimum.
Store the value in the cell 104.
104
57mm 1397mm
(2.2") (55.0")
Figure 10-2: SCAN potentiometer adjustment (cells 103 – 104)

Rev. 2
Before starting the adjustment of this movement, you must:

1. Move the table into a horizontal position. This ensures that when the scan is moved over
its full travel it does not create risks of collision between the II and the floor.
2. Remove the left-hand cover of the scan group.
3. Remove the main beam's left-hand side cover.
Move the scan towards the minimum position (head side) that must be found between the
outer left-hand limit of the main beam and the side of the Spot Film Device base plate. The
point to be reached is 62 mm (2.4").
(2.4")
Move the scan to the maximum position (feet side) and find the 1242 mm (50.0")
measurement among the same references used for the minimum.
Store the value in the cell 104.
104
62mm 1242mm
(2.4") (50.0")
Figure 10-3: SCAN potentiometer adjustment (cells 103 – 104)

Rev. 2
10.1.4 TILTING potentiometer adjustment (cells 105 and 106)
To carry out this adjustment, it is necessary to remove the basement cover.

At this point, on the basement it is visible the reference mark corresponding to –30° position.
The limit of the minimum position is obtained by bringing the lower edge of the main beam to
correspond to reference line on the basement (Figure 10-4).
With a level goniometer it will be possible to carry out a further check of the soundness of the
minimum positions.
Select cell 105 and store the parameter to memory.
-30°
Reference line
Figure 10-4: Minimum main beam position (cell 105)

Rev. 2
Take the main beam towards the maximum until it is perpendicular to the ground, using a
bubble level to check it is at right angle (+90° - Figure 10-5); select the cell 106 and store the
maximum value to memory.
+90°
Figure 10-5: Maximum main beam position (cell 106)

Rev. 2
10.1.5 LONGITUDINAL TABLETOP potentiometer adjustment

(cells 107 and 108)
Take the tabletop perfectly aligned with the sliding bars (Figure 10-6).
Enter in cell 107 and move the tabletop toward head side (minimum) until you masure with a
tape meter a value of 600 mm (23.6") from the sliding bar end and the edge of the tabletop
(Figure 10-7); store the potentiometer value.
Return the tabletop to the start position (aligned with the sliding bars).
Enter in cell 108 and move the tabletop toward foot side (maximum) until you measure a value
of 600 mm (23.6") from the sliding bar end and the edge of the tabletop (Figure 10-8); store
the potentiometer value.
Figure 10-6: Tabletop aligned with the sliding bars

Rev. 2
600 mm
(23.6")
Figure 10-7: Tabletop toward head side (minimum)

(cell 107)
600 mm
(23.6")
Figure 10-8: Tabletop toward foot side (maximum)

(cell 108)

Rev. 2
10.1.6 SOURCE TO FILM DISTANCE potentiometer

pot entiometer adjustment
(cells 113 – 114)
10.1.6.1 Version with SID 1000 ÷ 1500 mm (39.4" ÷ 59")
Remove the rear SID cover.

Take the tube holding arm towards the minimum position (low) that has to be found between
the upper surface of the mobile aluminium column and the upper edge of the swinging column.
The point to be reached is 42 mm (1.6").
(1.6") Select cell 113 and memorise the minimum value.
Move the tube holding arm to the maximum position (high) and find the 542 mm (21.3")
measurement between the same references used for the minimum.
Store the value in cell 114.
114
542mm
(21.3")
42mm
(1.6")
Figure 10-9: SOURCE TO FILM DISTANCE potentiometer adjustment

(cells 113 – 114)

Rev. 2
10.1.6.2 Version with SID 1100 ÷ 1800 mm (43.3" ÷ 70.9")
Remove the rear SID cover.

Take the tube holding arm towards the minimum position (low) that has to be found between
the upper surface of the mobile aluminium column and the upper edge of the swinging column.
Move the tube holding arm to the maximum position (high) and find the 739 mm (29.1")
114
739mm
(29.1")
39mm
(1.5")
Figure 10-10: SOURCE TO FILM DISTANCE potentiometer adjustment

(cells 113 – 114)

Rev. 2
10.1.7 TRANSVERSAL TABLETOP potentiometer adjustment

(cells 115 – 116)
Remove the main beam's right-hand side cover.

Take the tabletop towards the minimum (inner) position that must be detected between the
beam surface and the horizontal surface of the tabletop movement arm.
(6.7") Select cell 115
115 and memorise the minimum value.
Move the tabletop to the maximum position (feet side) and find the 520 mm (20.5")
Store the value 116 in the cell.
171mm
(6.7")
520mm
(20.5")
Figure 10-11: TRANSVERSAL TABLETOP potentiometer adjustment

(cells 115 – 116)

Rev. 2
Remove the main beam's right-hand side cover.

Take the tabletop towards the minimum (inner) position that must be detected between the
beam surface and the horizontal surface of the tabletop movement arm.
Move the tabletop to the maximum position (feet side) and find the 608 mm (23.9")
Store the value 116 in the cell.
259mm
(10.2")
608mm
(23.9")
Figura 10-12: TRANSVERSAL TABLETOP potentiometer adjustment

(cells 115 – 116)

Rev. 2
10.1.8 COMPRESSION FORCE potentiometer adjustment

(cells 123 – 124)
A compression dynamometer is required to perform this adjustment with a range from 1.5 kg
to 15.5 kg (3.3 lbs to 34.1 lbs).
Move the tabletop into the centred position and rest the dynamometer on it.
The minimum must be adjusted with no force applied to the cone; store the value in position
123.
123
Bring the cone down until a pressure of 15 Kg (33 lbs) as shown on the dynamometer is
exerted; store the value in position 124.
124

Rev. 2
10.1.9 GRID 1 potentiometer adjustment (cells 125 – 126)
Remove the upper cover of the Spot Film Device.

Move the grid 1 holding frame towards the minimum position (park) that must be found
between the grid centre and Spot Film Device centre line notch on the upper edge of the
shoulders. The point to be reached is 460 mm (18.1").
(18.1")
Move the frame to the maximum position (field) and find the 50 mm (1.9") measurement
126
460mm
(18.1")
50mm
(1.9")
Grid centre
(park position)
Centre line notch
Grid centre
(field position)
Figure 10-13: GRID 1 potentiometer adjustment (cells 125 – 126)

Rev. 2
10.1.10 CASSETTE CLOSE potentiometer adjustment (cells 127 – 128)
Remove the upper lid of the Spot Film Device.

Select cell 127 and operate the compressor joystick until the cassette close guides are fully
closed and the tightening switch is not activated.
Store the value.
Select position 128 and widen the guides until the required measurement indicated on the
display is achieved.
Store the value.
Warning
The adjustment of the cassette tightening guide potentiometer must be carried out
with the scanning assembly for the cross subdivision (optional) perfectly centred.
When the maximum is adjusted the greatest care must be taken to ensure the
guides do not violently strike the walls of the Spot Film Device but just brush them
slightly.
Forcing the guides causes damage to the protection fuse F22 on the Spot Film
Device board A4.

Rev. 2
10.1.10.1 CASSETTE TIGHTENING switch adjustment
The tightening switch's job is to ensure a certain contact between the cassette and the driving
belts.
This switch is ideally adjusted in order to get a pressure on the cassette guides of
approximately 6 Kg (13.2 lbs).
Insert a cassette with height 24 cm (10 ") to make the reference reading visible when the
switch is activated.
To respect the value of 6kg (13.2 lbs), the cam should stop in the 40° ± 10° position to be read
on the scale on the scroll.
Reference
scale
Graded
scale
Figure 10-14: CASSETTE TIGHTENING switch adjustment

Perform the following to check the correct functioning of the gripping system:
1. Move the table into a vertical position.
2. Insert a 35x43 cassette (14"x17") (direction 35 side / 14" height) resting it on the lower
guide.
Note
The cassette to use must be one of those the radiology room is equipped with. This
is because the check must be done under the worst operating conditions (maximum
weight in the lifting mode).
If the 35x43 (14"x17") size is not used, perform the test with the heaviest format
among those which are supplied.

Rev. 2
3. Operate the cassette insertion control.
If the calibration is correct, the switch should not intervene during the upward movement of
the cassette until both guides are in contact with the cassette and the 10° movement of the
cam on the scale has been made.
If this is not the case, work on the switch activating cam to bring its intervention forward or
delay it.
Warning
An adjustment that is not high enough (< 5 Kg / 11.0 lbs) causes the switch to cut in
early during the test described above.
An adjustment that is too high (> 7 Kg / 15.4 lbs) causes pressure that is to great
between the drive belts and cassette meaning the cassette has difficulty moving.

Rev. 2
10.1.11 CRO
CROSS SS SUBDIVISION potmenter adjustment (optional)
(cells 129 – 130)
Insert a cassette between the guides with height of 24 cm (10") on which there is a centre line
and tighten the guides to it.
Select cell 129 and push the compressor joystick until the centre line of the cassette is 65 mm
(2.6") away from the centre of the cassette supporting surface; store the value.
Select position 130 and repeat the operation in the opposite direction with respect to the
centre line; store the value.
Figure 10-15: CROSS SUBDIVISION potentiometer adjustment

(cells 129 – 130)

Rev. 2
10.1.12 SHUTTER potentiometer adjustment (cells 131 – 132)

Take the shutters towards the minimum position (fully open) that corresponds with an opening
equal to 475 mm (18.7") (Figure
( 10-16); select cell 131 and memorise the minimum value.
475mm
(18.7")
Figure 10-16: SHUTTER potentiometer adjustment (cell 131)
Take the shutters towards the maximum position (overlapping) and read the measurement of
145 mm (5.
(5 . 7 ") (Figure 10-17); store the value in cell 132.
132
145mm
(5.7")
Figure 10-17: SHUTTER potentiometer adjustment (cell 132)

Rev. 2
10.1.13 GRID 2 potentiometer adjustment (cells 133

1 33 – 1 34)
34 )

Move the grid 2 holding frame towards the minimum position (park) that must be found
between the grid centre and Spot Film Device centre line notch on the upper edge of the
shoulders. The point to be reached is 460 mm (18.1").
(18.1")
Select cell 1 33 and memorise the minimum value.
Move the frame to the maximum position (field) and find the 50 mm (1.9") measurement
Store the value in cell 1 34.
34
460mm
(18.1")
50mm
(1.9")
Grid centre
(park position)
Centre line notch
Grid centre
(field position)
Figure 10-18: GRID 2 potentiometer adjustment (cells 133 – 134)

Rev. 2

Service Manual – Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
Rev. 2
11 ACCESS AND DATA FUNCTION

FUNC TION OF ALL GROUPS
(EXCEPT GROUP 100)
To access the reading of the data stored in the various groups (except for group 100) the
following procedure must be followed.
 Reading data
1. Turn off the equipment, position the switch or switches of the DIP-switch group on
the CPU board, relating to the data group for which access is required, at ON (see
chapter 9).
Mode
CELL SERVICE
YYYY
XXX: Description of the cell set
where:
XXX = number of the group and the position
YYYYYY = value currently in the memory.
3. By pressing the and scrolling keys it is possible to increase and decrease

the cell to be displayed, respectively.
CELL
The cell number can also be selected by pressing key and digit
the number to be accessed on the displayed alphanumerical keyboard.

Rev. 2
 Data entry
1. Press on the area of the selected cell and hold it down for 1 sec; the display will show
a numerical keyboard asking to insert the access key:
Enter Key 1 2 3
4 5 6
ESC 7 8 9
C 0 -
.
Note
each start-up.
ESC
3. Press key (Enter) to confirm or to exit; on the "insert address key" area,
the display will show the message:
<< KEY OK >>
that indicates that it is possible to access group, thanks to the use of the code that
has just been keyed in, in function of which switches are positioned at ON (see
chapter 9).
C
In this case, press key (Clear) on the numerical keyboard and digit again the
access code. Confirm with key (Enter).
4. The display returns to the position of the previously selected cell.

Rev. 2
5. To modify the data, press on the area of the selected cell and hold it down for 1 sec;
the display will show a numerical keyboard:
Mode
CELL SERVICE
YYYY
XXX: Description of the cell set

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
C 0 -
ESC .
6. By using the numeric keys key in the data required and press the key (Enter) to
ESC
confirm the correction or to exit.
Note
In case of data with a negative value, enter the number first and then the sign.

Rev. 2
11.1 Group 200 – Installation data

The values of this group is related to the installation of the equipment.
Default data input during factory testing is present in the various cells. To ensure the
installation functions properly the correct values must be input.
11.1.1 Function of the parameters

parameter s of group 200
As the data stored in the cells of this group can be modified to render the machine fit for the
installation requirements, the default data set during the table adjustment in the factory is
shown in the second to last column in the table. The last column is for the service technician to
note any variations from the default data.

Service Manual - Access and data function of all groups (except group 100)
Rev. 2
Cell Display Function description Unit Default Setting

201 Left wall - table center The distance between the left wall and the table centre must be included in this mm - 4000
distance data. The table centre corresponds to the centre of the tabletop measured when
flat.
202 Right wall – table center The distance between the right wall and the table centre must be included in this mm 4000
distance data. The table centre corresponds to the centre of the tabletop measured when
flat.
203 Floor - ceiling distance Measure the distance between the floor and the ceiling bearing in mind the lowest mm 5000
point in the movement of the X-ray tube.
204 Floor-tube safety distance The value inserted in this field will determine the minimum distance from the floor mm 200
that the X-ray tube can reach.
205 Ceiling safety distance The value inserted in this field will determine the minimum distance from the mm 200
ceiling that each element of the table can reach.
206 Walls safety distance The value inserted in this field will determine the minimum distanced from the left mm 200
and right walls that each element of the table can reach.
207 II-floor safety distance This determines the minimum distance that the I.I. will reach from the floor during mm 100
the run of the scan toward the head end with the machine in trendelenbourg.
208 Longitudinal tabletop and This distance, added to the tabletop and I.I. floor safety distance, determines the mm 100
I.I. return band start of the tabletop return after a collision during tilting.
209 I.I. vertical dimension The dimension measured between the upper "face" of the I.I. (screen input area) mm 578
and the lower part furthest away (the coverage zone of the camera or the base of
the angulation motor coverage if a 9" I.I. is present) must be introduced in this cell.
210 I.I. bottom half size The value to be stored must be that which corresponds to half of the mm 108
measurement of the lower part of the II (typically the measurement of the
television camera radius must be input).

Rev. 2

Tube equivalent radius at 0° 340
(tables with SID 1000÷1500
mm / 39.4"÷59") The half width of the hood value must be stored to memory. Remember however
211 that since the rear end of the tube holding arm is 340 mm (13.4") from the tube mm
Tube equivalent radius at 0° attachment pin, the minimum data that can be entered is 340 mm (13.4"). 431
(tables with SID 1100÷1800
mm / 43.3"÷70.9")
212 Casing/collimator eq. radius if The height to key into this cell must be that which was measured between the mm 350
not at 0° tube attachment shaft and the furthest point from the tube-collimator assembly.
Typically the point corresponds with the collimator sharp edge furthest from the
shaft.
213 Focus - tube shaft distance Input the vertical distance between the focus position and the tube fixing pin. mm -10
214 I.I. minimum field Include the nominal measurement of the minimum II field (maximum enlargement). mm 158
215 I.I. medium field Include the nominal measurement of the medium II field (medium enlargement). mm 250
216 I.I. max field Insert the rated value of the I.I. rated field in the case of a three-field intensifier. If mm 312
a four-field II is installed the field value must be input with minimum
enlargement.
217 Tomo/Stitching dead band See the description of cell 224 for the definition of the dead band. mm 1
The value to be input into this cell will be activated for the SID movement in Tomo
and Stitching
219 Cassette exposure position If it is necessary to modify the exposure positioning runs of cassettes of the same mm 0
correction number, the correction value required must be input into this cell.
220 0 – MAX position distance by This data makes it possible to centre the grid 1 on the rays perfectly. The data mm 50
grid 1 inserted determines the distance between the potentiometer maximum and the 0
grid 1 position.

Rev. 2

221 Park – MIN distance by grid 1 This data makes it possible to position the grid 1 properly in the park. The data mm 10
inserted determines the distance between the potentiometer minimum and the
grid 1 parking position.
222 Total grid 1 oscillation length Since the grid 1 performs an oscillation during the exposure, the value in this cell mm 45
makes it possible to determine the total value of this oscillation. Since the grid 1
oscillates symmetrically around point 0, the total oscillation has a value that is
equal to double the half run calculated from the 0 point.
223 Exposure delay after grid 1 This data makes it possible to synchronise the movement of the grid 1 with the seconds. 0.40
0. 40
start X-rays exposure. The data depends on the generator characteristics and it is
advisable to use the smallest possible values to avoid delays between the X-ray
request and the response.
224 Transversal tabletop dead The dead band is "the window" around the set point, that once reached turns off mm 8
band the movement. The smaller this value is, the more precise the positioning with
relation to the end runs (min, max and centering) but the risk of movement
oscillations increases around the set point when the stop is requested. A
compromise value must be inserted between these two effects to optimise the
movement of the transversal tabletop.
225 SID dead band See the description of cell 224 for the definition of the dead band. mm 2
The value to be input into this cell will be activated for the SID movement at the
min and the max.
226 Compression force dead band See the description of cell 224 for the definition of the dead band. kg 0.5
The value to be input in this cell will be activated for the set point of the
compression force, set by means of the control panel keys, when applied to the
patient.

Rev. 2

227 Grid 1 dead band See the description of cell 224 for the definition of the dead band. mm 2
The value to be input into this cell will be active for the grid 1 movement at the
min, max, 0 and the limits of the movement in oscillation.
228 Gripping dead band See the description of cell 224 for the definition of the dead band. mm 3
The value to be inserted in this cell will be active for the cassette guide movement
only at the maximum opening. This data must be input with maximum care
because too small a value will determine a collision between the guides and the
walls of the Spot Film Device risking a breakage of the motor protection fuse
while too great a value will make the loading of the 43 size cassette difficult.
229 Grid 2 dead band See the description of cell 224 for the definition of the dead band. mm 2
The value to be input into this cell will be active for the grid 2 movement at the
min, max, 0 and the limits of the movement in oscillation.
230 0 – MAX position distance by This data makes it possible to centre the grid 2 on the rays perfectly. The data mm 50
grid 1 inserted determines the distance between the potentiometer maximum and the 0
grid 2 position.
231 Park – MIN distance by grid 2 This data makes it possible to position the grid 2 properly in the park. The data mm 10
inserted determines the distance between the potentiometer minimum and the
grid 2 parking position.
232 Total grid 2 oscillation length Since the grid 2 performs an oscillation during the exposure, the value in this cell mm 45
makes it possible to determine the total value of this oscillation. Since the grid 2
oscillates symmetrically around point 0, the total oscillation has a value that is
equal to double the half run calculated from the 0 point.

Rev. 2

233 Exposure delay after grid 2 This data makes it possible to synchronise the movement of the grid 2 with the seconds. 0.4
0. 4 0
start X-rays exposure. The data depends on the generator characteristics and it is
advisable to use the smallest possible values to avoid delays between the X-ray
request and the response.
235 Transversal tabletop average Since the transversal tabletop is not controlled by PDI logic but by an on/off mm/s 54
speed movement with potentiometer feedback only for position monitoring, the logic is
not able to correct the speed. It will therefore be possible for the logic to monitor
an excessive position error caused by a mechanical defect (movement
/potentiometer coupling etc.). To recognise such an error however the logic must
know the average speed of the tabletop movement in all its conditions. The
average value of this speed must be inserted in this cell after having calculated it
as described in cell 262.
SID average speed (tables What is described for cell 235 applies. mm/s 25
with SID 1000÷1500 mm /
39.4"÷59")
236
SID average speed (tables What is described for cell 235 applies. See also section 16.1 mm/s 39
with SID 1100÷1800 mm /
43.3"÷70.9")
SID Height after Tomo (tables 100
with SID 1000÷1500 mm / This value determines the position that the SID automatically assumes when the
39.4"÷59") tomography output function is completed.
237 cm
SID Height after Tomo (tables If a value outside the SID range is set, the positioning at the Tomo output will be 110
with SID 1100÷1800 mm / made in correspondence with the limits.
43.3"÷70.9")

Rev. 2

238 II diam percentage per angio The length of the step in angio step mode depends on the II field selected. % 90
step However to get a slight overlap between one step and the next, that helps in the
reconstruction of the contrast liquid passage, it is necessary for the length of the
step is lightly shorter with regard to the II diameter. The length of the step can be
reduced in percentage terms through the data that is placed in this cell.
239 Scan return band for floor Raising the collision limit of the floor used during collision in tilting. mm 50
collision
Stitching SID (tables with SID 1 4 00
1000÷1500 mm / 39.4"÷59")
240 This cell sets the SID value for Stitching exams (1400 to max SID) mm
Stitching SID (tables with SID 1800
1100÷1800 mm / 43.3"÷70.9")
241 Correction of shutters This value determines the shutters' position correction with respect to the width mm 0 .0
position in fluoro reduction collimator when a limitation of the standard format is performed. This correction is
not applied:
- on the I.I. format
- on the subdivision format.
244 0=1^ vel 1=2^ vel 2=3^ vel This value determines which speed will be set as default at the input of the tomo -- 0
3=4^ vel mode
Default Tomo speed
245 0 = 7° 1 = 20° 2 = 30° This value determines which angle will be set as default at the input of the Tomo -- 3
3 = 45° mode
Default Tomo angle

Rev. 2
Cell Display Function description

descrip tion Unit Default Setting
246 0=disab 1=filters 2=ROI The function of the dedicated key and related outputs can be configured depending -- Dependin
on the TV chain installed on the table or the presence of a collimator with g upon
motorized additional filters selection and on the needs of operators. There are 5 version
functions:
- 0 = disabled function
- 1= filter display (CCDx0 – CCDx2 – CCDx4 – CCDx8). Activation of the three
relative outputs.
- 2 = ROI display (large – small). Activation of the output corresponding to CCDx0
when "large" is displayed.
247 0=I - 1=GB - 2=F - 3= E - Depending on the country where the system is installed, it is possible to choose -- Dependin
4=D – 5=Ru – 6=HO what language the messages will be displayed in. This applies to all the messages g upon
that are displayed during the regular operation of the equipment. With regard to version
the display of the technical subroutines (functions that can be accessed through
the DIP-switches) there are two languages: Italian with selection = 0, English for
all the other selections.
250 0 = no 1 = yes This setting determines whether when the equipment is turned on or each time -- 0
Collimator hold mode default the "automatic collimator" mode is selected, the Hold function is active by default
or whether it must be activated by the operator by pushing the relative key.
251 0 = absent 1 = cross Cassette cross subdivision present -- Dependin
subdivision present g upon
version

Rev. 2

252 0=foot-head 1=head-foot This determines the succession of radiograms for the cross subdivisions. -- 0
Cross subdivision sequence
1 2
- 0=
3 4
3 4
- 1= 1 2
253 0 = no 1 = yes The table version with SID 1000 ÷ 1500 mm (39.4" ÷ 59"), has the angulation -- Dependin
Centering angulation motor motor in asymmetric position. Consequently the scan range is reduced on the g upon
motor side during tilting movements in Trendelenbourg direction, to avoid the version
collision between motor and floor.
The table version with SID 1100 ÷ 1800 mm (43.3" ÷ 70.9"), has the angulation
motor in centred position, consequently no scan limitation is required.
This cell set depends by the table version and define the scan range limitation
depending by the tilt angle.
254 0 = no 1 = yes The table is designed to allow the implementation of a safety circuits against -- Dependin
Anticrushing safety device entrapment of parts between the tabletop inner profile and the Spot Film rear side g upon
and between the column and Spot Film Device lateral side. If this circuit is installed version
it will be necessary to activate the relative input software control using this
setting. The 415/480V versions are always equipped with this circuit.

Rev. 2

255 0 = no 1 = yes With the value in that cell equal to 0, i.e. NO, if during the tilting movement the -- 0 for
Scan and tabletop movement scan or the tabletop approach collision with the floor, tilting will be stopped until 2 - way
in collision the operator has moved the part involved in the collision. With cell set to 1, as in
the 4-way version, the scan and tabletop will be moved automatically as possible, 1 for
while maintaining the centering. In the case of 2-way tabletop, the scan will move 4 - way
loosing centering.
257 0 = cm 1 = inch The selection depends on the cassettes that are available. -- 0
Cassette type
258 0 = 2-way 1 = 4-way 2 or 4 way tabletop configuration. -- 0 for
2 - way
1 for
4 - way
259 0=off-off 1=off-on Dependent on the type of TV chain installed, it might be necessary to activate the -- 0
Horizontal image scan reverse horizontal image scan reverse output by default. The 0 selection determines that
when the table is switched on both the dedicated key LED and the its output are
Off By pressing the key the LED lights and the output is activated.
When the table is on, selection 1 determines the automatic activation of the output
with the led of the relative key off. When the horizontal image scan reverse key is
pressed the led comes on and the output is turned off.
260 0 = off-off 1 = off-on What was described for cell 259 is valid here applied to the vertical image scan -- 0
Vertical image scan reverse reverse function.
261 0 = enable 1 = disable It disables the Spot Film Device controls. The initialisation functions and all the -- 0
SDF disabling relative modes are no longer performed. This override is present when the table is
in the “all digital” version.
This can be activated if the Spot Film Device breaks down to exclude alarms and
any disabling.

Rev. 2

262 0=normal 1= service In standard operating mode this function must always be deactivated. -- 0
Technical service function The activation determines the display of the message "SERVICE FUNCTION
ACTIVE" and enables the following procedures that can be used for service and
control operations.
- Display of the instant speeds
By activating the movement of the tabletop or the SID the speed is visualised
thanks to the potentiometer feedback. The speed in all load conditions and
position of the equipment must be checked, the various values noted and the
average obtained. The values that can be obtained in this way must be
inserted in cell 235 for transversal tabletop and 236 for the SID. The
measurement of the speeds only needs to be done if the movement
potentiometers have already been adjusted. Otherwise the value shown is not
real.
- Exclusion of the collimator limitation and the Spot Film Device
shutters
The collimator and the Spot Film Device shutters do not perform the limitation
on the II or cassette size thereby permitting any checks and measurements to
be made on the Spot Film Device or the exposed films.
263 0=no 1=yes Invert the Down-up direction command when the "Monitor Orientation" function is -- 0
Movements inversion selected.
Down-Up
264 0=no 1=yes Invert the Right-Left direction command when the "Monitor Orientation" function -- 0
Movements inversion R-L is selected.
265 0 = cm–kg 1 = inch-lbs Set the displays of the SID, layer and compression force values in cm-kg or -- 0
Display parameters inch-lbs.

Rev. 2

2 66 0=standard 1=dual grid This cell specifies the type of Spot Film Device: -- Depending
Spot Film Device type - 0 = standard: divisions available; single grid upon version
- 1 = divisions not available; dual grid.
2 67 SID position for grid switching This cell defines the SID value for the automatic switch: grid 1  grid 2 and cm 143
viceversa.
268
268 SID dead band for grid Dead band for SID automatic grid switch. cm 1
switching
269 Grid 1 nominal focalization This datum corresponds to the nominal grid 1 focalization. The value inserted in mm 120
display this cell (cm unit) will be displayed on the touch screen when grid 1 will be in field.
Grid 2 nominal focalization 140
display (tables with SID
1000÷1500 mm / 39.4"÷59") This datum corresponds to the nominal grid 2 focalization. The value inserted in
270 mm
Grid 2 nominal focalization this cell (cm unit) will be displayed on the touch screen when grid 2 will be in field. 180
display (tables with SID
1100÷1800 mm / 43.3"÷70.9")
271 0=LCD 1=TSC This cell specifies the type of collimator: -- Depending
Collimator type - 0 = LCD display upon version
- 1 = TSC Touch Screen display.
272 0=disable Dependent if the collimator present is equipped with motorised additional filters. -- Depending
1=collimator additionals filters - 0 = collimator without motorized additional filters upon version
- 1 = collimator additional filters (+2Al ; +1Al +0.2Cu; +1Al +0.1Cu).
273 0=no 1=yes This depends on the collimator type that can be square/rectangular field (0) or -- Depending
Iris collimator square/rectangular field with iris (1). upon version

Rev. 2

280 0=no 1=yes This cell must be set depending if the DIVA HDE unit is integrated in the system. -- Depending
DIVA HDE If not, this set does not need to be initialized. upon version
281 Scan extra safety distance This data make it possible to obtain an increased scanning run when the table is -- - 20
tilted at low angles.
When tilting the table with Spot Film Device close to the head/foot position, even
at low tilting angles the SFD unit can be moved back and forth without limitation
of the useful run.
282 Stitching default stations This cell sets the default number of Stations for Stitching procedure -- 3
283 Stitching overlap This cells sets the overlap between contiguous stitching images mm 100
284 Stitching additional delay This cell sets the additional delay between two stitching station acquisitions sec 10
285 0=disable 1=enable This cell must be set to 1 if Tomo function is enabled in the system (VDX mode -- 0
VDX tomo enable only)

Rev. 2
11.2 Group 300 – PDI controlled motor data

This group contains the values linked to the operation of the motors controlled using the PDI
(proportional, derived, integral) method.
Default data input during factory testing is present in the various cells.
This data is essential for the proper functioning of the equipment.
Before varying any data of this program whatsoever it is important to understand its meaning,
its function and the possible consequences, thoroughly.
The brief explanation given below is useful to better understand the function of the various
cells present for each of the motors controlled using this system.
11.2.1 Theory of functioning of an axis with PID control
To move an axis, the control software must know:

• the departure point of the movement
• the point of arrival.
The departure point is known because it corresponds with the position in which the axis is.
The arrival point is determined by the choice made when a movement is selected.
To reach the arrival point it is therefore necessary to describe a trajectory.
This trajectory will be created thanks to the data inserted in the cells containing the speed and
acceleration values.
To perform the movement it will therefore be necessary for the software to carry out two
separate functions:
• the generation of the trajectory
• following the trajectory.
• Generation of the trajectory

The software constructs a variable that represents the point where the movement should
be moment by moment.
This variable is called the theoretical trajectory.
Having the departure point as the origin, the generation of the theoretical trajectory
consists of:
– a rise, i.e. a stretch of acceleration that rises steadily linearly
– a stretch of constant speed
– a descent with acceleration equal to the rise acceleration but with a negative sign.
The speed and acceleration values used for the generation of the theoretical trajectory are
those inserted in the relative cells.

Rev. 2
• Following the trajectory

The following of the theoretical trajectory constructs a variable that generates the real
trajectory.
This variable will then be translated into the reference signal (Vref), sent to the activation
that controls the axis motor.
This signal will be modulated in such a way as to approximate the preceding theoretical
trajectory as closely as possible.
This variable is the sum of three components:
– Proportional
The proportional part is product of the multiplication:
"instantaneous error" X "proportional gain"
where:
– the instantaneous error is given by the difference between the real position
(monitored by the feed back of the potentiometer or encoder) and that
theoretical (calculated by the generation of the trajectory)
– the proportional gain is inserted in the dedicated cell.
– Integral
The integral part is product of the multiplication:
"sum of the errors" X "integral gain"

where:
– the sum of the errors is obtained by the sampling conducted every millisecond
that calculates the positioning error between the real trajectory and the
theoretical one.
The error can take a negative and positive value according to whether the real
trajectory is before or after the theoretical one.
The sum of all these errors sampled will be algebraic, that is to say, it will take
the error's negative or positive sign into account.
The sum of the errors will therefore be a number that is accumulated during the
accomplishment of the whole trajectory.
– the integral gain is inserted in the dedicated cell.
– Derivative
The derivative part is the product of the multiplication:
"error difference between 2 samplings" X "derivative gain"

where:
– the error difference between 2 samplings,
samplings is calculated on the basis of an
interval time that must be set in the dedicated cell.
This interval expressed in msec. is called "derivative sampling period".
The position error, i.e. the difference between the real and the theoretical
trajectories, is calculated at each sampling.
The difference between the error detected in a sampling and the error detected
in the next sampling shows the extent to which the actual trajectory has
changed its position with respect to the theoretical one.
– the derivative gain is inserted in the dedicated cell.

Rev. 2
So far the following fields have been analysed:

• Proportional gain
• Integral gain
• Period of derivative sampling
• Derivative gain
Here below is a brief analysis of the remaining fields responsible for the control of a PDI axis.
• Integration limit
limit
This is the maximum value that the sum of the integral action errors can assume.
If the sum of the errors exceeds the value set in this cell, it will be limited in accordance
with the limit set.
If the data set in this cell is 0 no limitation will be performed.
This parameter avoids action that is too extreme in the case that the sum assumes values
that are considerable.
• Motor STOP error

When the difference between the actual and the theoretical position of a movement
reaches a value that is equal to the one set in the cell, the movement will be stopped.
• Delay motor turning off

This delay is the time after which, at the end of the run, the motor is turned off.
This time allows to make up for a possible real positioning error as opposed to a
theoretical one.
This allows the integral action to complete its function.
By inserting the value 0 the movement is never stopped.
• Braking time
This value permits to ramp down the motion independently of the acceleration ramp. The
time inserted into these cells is equal to the time the motion employs to pass from the
actual speed to 0 in a linear way. This occurs regardlessly of the real position with respect
to the theoretical one. In this case, the integral position recovery actions are not carried
out and the motor turning off delay does not have effect. This braking modality is used for
the following movements: tilting, scan and angulation.

Rev. 2
11.2.2 Motors check data function
The following tables, divided by motor, contain the data relative to the various PDI-controlled
motors.
Angulation movement
Cell Function Default Set

301 Period derivative sampl. 0.001
302 Proportional gain 200
303 Integral gain 0
304 Derivative gain 200
305 Integration limit (°) 20
306 Joystick and tomo 1st (°/sec) speed 11.5
307 2nd (°/sec) tomo speed 15.0
308 3rd tomo speed (°/sec) 19.0
309 4th tomo speed (°/sec) 23.0
310 Joystick and tomo 1st (°/sec2) acceleration 29.0
311 2nd (°/sec2) tomo acceleration 33.0
312 3rd tomo acceleration (°/sec2) 42.0
313 4th tomo acceleration (°/sec2) 60.0
314 Angulation speed in Stitching (°/sec) 6 .0
315
315 Error stop motor (°) 8
316
31 6 Braking time (sec) 0.3

Rev. 2
Scan movement

319 Integral gain 0
321 Integration limit (mm) 20
322 Joystick initial speed (mm/sec) 40
323 Joystick final speed (mm/sec) 150
324 Angio step speed (mm/sec) 300
325 Angio return speed (mm/sec) 300
326 Joystick acceleration and angio return (mm/sec2) 250
Angio step acceleration (mm/sec2) (tables with SID
300
1000÷1500 mm / 39.4"÷59")
327
Angio step acceleration (mm/sec2) (tables with SID
250
1100÷1800 mm / 43.3"÷70.9")
328 Time between two speed increases (ms) 1500
329 Error stop motor (mm) 100
330 Scanning Speed in Stitching positioning (mm/sec) 100
331 Scanning Speed in Stitching return (mm/sec) 100
332 Braking time (sec) 0.5
333 Scanning Acceleration in Stitching return 250
(mm/sec2)
334
33 4 Scanning Acceleration in Stitching positioning 150
(mm/sec2)
Tilting movement

337 Integral gain 0
339 Integration limit 20
340 Low tilting speed (°/sec) 4.5
341 High tilting speed (°/sec) 6.0
342 Collision tilting speed (°/sec) 2.0
343 Slow tilting speed acceleration (°/sec2) 4.5
344 High tilting speed acceleration (°/sec2) 6.0
345 Collision acceleration 2.0
346 Error stop motor (°) 5
349 Braking time (sec) 0.6

Rev. 2
Longitudinal tabletop movement (Optional)

352 Integral gain 0
354 Integration limit (mm) 20.0
20 .0
355 Joystick initial speed (mm/sec) 30.0
30 .0
356 Joystick final speed (mm/sec) 55.0
357 Collision speed (mm/sec) 55.0
358 Joystick acceleration (mm/sec2) 40.0
359 Time between two speed increases (ms) 1500
360 Collision acceleration (mm/sec) 60.0
364 Delay turning off motor (sec) 0.3
Shutters movement

367 Integral gain 50
369 Integration limit (mm) 50
370 Initialisation speed (mm/sec) 100.0
372 Work speed (mm/sec) 300.0
373 Initialisation speed acceleration (mm/sec2) 100.0
374 Working speed acceleration (mm/sec2) 1200.0

Rev. 2
Cassette movement

381 Integration limit (mm) 50.0
Access speed (until cassette size photosens.)
382 600.0
(mm/sec)
383 IN-OUT speed (mm/sec) 400.0
Work speed (mm/sec) 1000.0
384 Work speed (mm/sec)
900.0
900 .0
(table equipped with VDX option)
385 Access and IN-OUT speed acceleration (mm/sec2) 300.0
Working speed acceleration (mm/sec2) 6000
386 Working speed acceleration (mm/sec2)
2000
(table equipped with VDX option)
Cross subdivision movement (Optional)

393 Integration limit 10.0
395 Initialisation speed (mm/sec) 30.0
396 Work speed (mm/sec) 90.0
397 Initialisation speed acceleration (mm/sec2) 12.0
398 Working speed acceleration (mm/sec2) 2000.0
399 Error stop motor (mm) 35.0

Rev. 2
11.3 Group 400 / 500 / 600 – Dimensions and runs

This group contains data that have various functions.
The function of the various cells is listed in the following tables divided by groups.
11.3.1 Range of runs carried out by movements with potentiometer

feedback
As explained in the Chapter about potentiometers adjustment, the limit to reach for the
calibration is shown on the display.
This limit is set in this block of data.
To vary the value of the set default data means to adjust the movement run range.
This will entail:

• the variation of the equipment specification
• the adjustment of the potentiometer minimum and maximum calibration
• the adjustment of the emergency switches position.
Moreover, it will be necessary to check if the movement mechanics can sustain such variation.
The software will divide the new run range by the number of potentiometer's points that are
going to be sampled between the minimum and maximum value of the new run.
Warning
Do not modify the data in this group as they are linked to the operative
characteristic of the equipment.

Rev. 2

401 Angulation: minimum position Software min end of run position for angulation movement ° - 40.0
402 Angulation: maximum position Software max end of run position for angulation movement ° 40.0
403 Scan: minimum position 4 way tabletop software min end of run position for scan movement mm - 660
2 way tabletop software min end of run position for scan movement mm - 670
404 Scan: maximum position 4 way tabletop software max end of run position for scan movement mm 515
2 way tabletop software max end of run position for scan movement mm 670
405 Tilting: minimum position Software min end of run position for tilting movement ° - 29
406 Tilting: maximum position Software max end of run position for tilting movement ° 90
407 Longitudinal tabletop: Software min end of run position for tabletop longitudinal movement mm - 600
minimum position
408 Longitudinal tabletop: Software max end of run position for tabletop longitudinal movement mm 600
maximum position
409 Transversal tabletop: Software min end of run position for tabletop transversal movement mm - 175
minimum position
410 Transversal tabletop: Software max end of run position for tabletop transversal movement mm 175
maximum position
411 X-ray tube pin/Film distance: Software min end of run position for SID 1000/1500 mm (39.4"/59") movement mm 1006
100 6
minimum position Software min end of run position for SID 1100/1800 mm (43.3"/70.9") movement mm 1106
412 X-ray tube pin/Film distance: Software max end of run position for SID 1000/1500 mm (39.4"/59") movement mm 1516
maximum position Software max end of run position for SID 1100/1800 mm (43.3"/70.9") movement mm 1806

Rev. 2

413 WB width cassette: min Minimum position of the width side cassette gripping device "Sensing" cassette mm 140
position holder
414 WB width cassette: max Maximum position of the width side cassette gripping device "Sensing" cassette mm 465
position holder
415 WB height cassette: min Minimum position of the cassette size sensing device height side "Sensing" mm 140
position cassette holder
416 WB height cassette: max Maximum position of the cassette size sensing device height side "Sensing" mm 465
position cassette holder
417 Compression force: minimum Software minimum end of run position for compression force kg 1.5
418 Compression force: maximum Software maximum end of run position for compression force kg 15.5
419 Grid 1: minimum position Software minimum end of run position for grid 1 movement mm 0
420 Grid 1: maximum position Software maximum end of run position for grid 1 movement mm 510
51 0
421 Gripping: minimum size Software minimum end of run position for gripping movement mm 146
422 Gripping: maximum size Software maximum end of run position for gripping movement mm 463
423 Cross subdivision: minimum Software minimum end of run position for cross subdivision movement mm - 65
position
424 Cross subdivision: maximum Software maximum end of run position for cross subdivision movement mm 65
position
425 Shutters: minimum position Software minimum end of run position for shutters movement mm 0.0
426 Shutters: maximum position Software maximum end of run position for shutters movement mm 495

Rev. 2
11.3.2 Equipment mechanical dimensions
This block of data contains some mechanical dimensions characteristic of this equipment.
The software uses these dimensions to perform calculations of the various functions'
management algorithms (anticollision, tomography, and tilting functions, etc.).
Warning
These data are closely linked to the equipment and therefore should never be
modified in order to avoid modifications to the equipment functioning.

Rev. 2

Rev. 2

427 Trendelenbourg maximum The calibration of the tilting potentiometer determines the minimum ° - 28
position trendelenbourg position of -30 °. This limit may need to be changed for greater
patient comfort or to limit the tilting excursion. The set value is between 0° and –
30°; if a value between –27° and –30° is set, the display will always indicate –30°
on reaching the limit.
428 Maximum vertical position The calibration of the tilting potentiometer determines the maximum vertical ° 89
position of +90°.This limit may need to be changed for greater patient comfort or
to limit the tilting excursion. The set value is between 0° and +90°; if a value
between +87° and +90° is set, the display will always indicate +90° on reaching
the limit.
429 Grid 2: minimum position Software minimum end of run position for grid 2 movement. mm 0
430 Grid 2: maximum position Software minimum end of run position for grid 2 movement. mm 510
431 Beam centre - Tabletop Horizontal distance of the beam from the tabletop centre. It is used to calculate mm 50
centre distance the collision.
432 Column casing radius Radius of the centre limited to the column casing. It is used to calculate the mm 105
collision.
433 X-ray tube pin – Column cap This is the vertical distance of the SID casing centre from the X-ray tube rotation mm 355
distance centre. It is used to calculate the collision.
434 Tilting pin - I.I. screen Horizontal distance of the tilting centre from the I.I. cap. mm 87
distance
435 Scan pin - Tilting centre Horizontal distance of the tilting centre from the main beam centre. mm 289
distance
436 Tilting pin - Left main beam Horizontal distance of the tilting centre from the left edge of the main beam. mm 1442
edge distance
437 Tilting pin - Upper main beam Vertical distance of the main beam cap from the tilting centre. mm 205
edge distance

Rev. 2

438 Distance tabletop – image It is the distance between the tabletop and the image receptor. The data is used mm 75 for
receptor to calculate the layer in the tomo modality. 2 - way
78 for
4 - way
439 Tabletop length Length of the tabletop mm 2200
440 Tilting pin - angulation pin Vertical distance of the tilting centre from the angulation centre mm 64
distance
441 Angulation pin - Angulation Vertical distance of the angulation centre from the lower edge of the compact mm 401
motor distance angulation motor
Vertical distance of the angulation centre from the lower edge of the NON- mm 525
compact angulation motor
442 I.I. – Image receptor distance This value is the distance between the image receptor and the I.I. screen. The mm 18
value is used for the collimation and for the calculation of scan's run for the tilted (see
projections and for tomography. NOTE)
443 Image receptor - shutters It is the distance between the image receptor and the shutters inside the Spot mm 12
distance Film Device. The value is used to correctly perform the collimation.
444 Park – Format reading The present value corresponds to the distance between the parking and the mm 472
photocell distance cassette size photosensor. It is used to correctly position the cassette in the
parking position.
445 Tilting pin - Floor distance Height of the tilting centre from the floor. mm 818
446 Left Projection Angulation Horizontal distance of the angulation centre from the left projection of the mm 317
Motor -Angulation Pin compact angulation motor
Horizontal distance of the angulation centre from the left projection of the NON- mm 386
compact angulation motor
NOTE: These values will need to be modified in accordance with the dimension and the type of installed I.I.. The correct value will ensure the correspondence
between the set layer and the real one in the Digital tomo modality and for the inclined projections.

Rev. 2
11.3.3 Data relative to single fault potentiometer controls
This block of data is used to check the potentiometers and the functions linked to single faults.
A detailed description of the functions is reported in each cell.

Rev. 2

Rev. 2

447 Max error for transversal The value in cell 235 represents the average speed for the transversal tabletop mm 200
tabletop movement (see section 11.1.1) As the real speed will never be identical to the stored
speed, during the movement, an error will indicate the discrepancy between the
real and the theoretical position. This error will be reset once the movement is
stopped. If the error takes on a value equal to the one stored in this cell, alarm 218
is issued.
448 Max error for SID It holds the same as for the transversal tabletop movement. mm 3 00
With respect to the SID movement, the average speed is stored in cell 236 and in
case the error value is reached, alarm 220 will be displayed.
449 Max error for stopped The processor checks that the movements' potentiometers do not undergo N/4096 300
potentiometers variations if the same movements are not active. This is done in order to
guarantee the Single Fault safety.
The number to store in this cell must take into account possible movements
caused by the momentum of inertia after the movement arrest.
The measurement unit is expressed in "potentiometer points", in other words, a
value corresponding to the unit after the AD conversion.
The greater this value the wider the movement carried out with request prior to
the processor displaying the alarm. For potentially "dangerous" movements
potentiometers, a cell is available for each movement (see following cells).
In this cell the collimator, Spot Film Device and compressor movements
potentiometers are checked.

Rev. 2

450 Extra-run max pot. out of SW This cell's value refers to the extra-runs that the potentiometer can carry out in N/4096 50
range proximity of the software range without generating an alarm.
This extra run can be caused, for instance, by dead bands.
If the potentiometer exceeds, during the extra run, the value set in this cell, an
alarm will be generated indicating the excessive proximity of the potentiometer to
the limits.
All this permits to detect if the potentiometer circuit is interrupted when powering
on.
451 Max time of Joyst. non- It is present the data relative to the check of correspondence of the activation and sec 5.00
corresp - S.F. single faults circuits.
The time value set in this cell, with measuring unit expressed in sec., is equal to
the window inside which a single fault alarm is generated (231 or 232) in case
there is no correspondence between the activation and single fault circuits.
452 Max error for stopped It holds the same as for cell 449 applied to the angulation movement. The value is ° 1.0
angulation pot. expressed in degrees and it is the maximum involuntary movement allowed
without generating an alarm.
453 Max error for stopped scan See cell 452 applied to the scan movement. mm 15
pot.
454 Max error for stopped tilting See cell 452 applied to the Tilting movement. ° 2.0
pot.
455 Max error for stopped See cell 452 applied to the longitudinal tabletop movement. mm 15
longitudinal tabletop pot.
456 Max error for stopped See cell 452 applied to the transversal tabletop movement. mm 15
transversal tabletop pot.
457 Max error for stopped SID See cell 452 applied to the SID movement. mm 15
pot.

Rev. 2
Cell Display Function description Unit

Uni t Default Setting
458 Gripping device opening The impulse drive was introduced to limit the gripper opening movement speed. % 60
movement duty cycle The activation time is fixed at 5 ms, the shutoff time between 2 pulses can be set
in this cell.
This setting is expressed in% and is calculated in the table below:
% set Time OFF (ms)
40 ÷ 44 6
45 ÷ 55 5
56 ÷ 65 4
66 ÷ 75 3
76 ÷ 85 2
86 ÷ 95 1
96 ÷ 100 0
459 Cross subdivision The value to be stored in this cell determines the displacement that the cross mm - 60.0
displacement (head side) subdivision movement will perform toward the head side with respect to the
central position.
460 Cross subdivision It holds the same as for cell 459 as to the displacement towards the feet side. mm 60.0
displacement (feet side)

Rev. 2

Rev. 2
11.3.4 Spot Film Device cassette and shutters run
This block contains the runs carried out by the Spot Film Device cassette and shutters to
perform the various cassettes subdivisions and the relative limitation.
In case the separating lines of the X-rays of some subdivisions are not perfect, it is possible to
modify these runs, by following closely the instructions reported in the dedicated Chapter.
Note
The cassette and shutters positioning might not correspond to the measure in the
relative cell because of the mechanical inactivity of the system.
In every way the correction in mm introduced in the cells has an increment and
decrement effect in the final amount equal to the value of the correction.
For rapid consultation and interpretation, the runs and the relative cells are summed up in
tables where the first number indicates the cell number and the second, in brackets, the stored
data in mm.

Rev. 2
11.3.4.1 Calculation of the cassette run
The calculation is based on the distance of cassette internal side, when the same is in the
parking position, with respect to centre of the Spot Film Device. Such distance is divided into 2
parts:
• the distance of the cassette size photosensor from the centre of the Spot Film Device
(227 mm / 8.9")
• the distance of the cassette size photosensor from the internal side of the Spot Film
Device (484 mm / 19.0")
The distance of 484 mm (19.0 ") is obtained because the distance of the photocell from the
bottom of the Spot Film Device (cell 444) is 472 mm (18.6"), but the cassette parks position is
set by the SW:
• 5 mm (0.2 ") from the bottom after the introduction of the cassette in the SFD
• 20 mm (0.8 ") from the bottom on the return of a preparation run or test.
Note
The figures reported in the tables and stored in the cells refer to the cassette
parking position at 20 mm (0.8") from the bottom of the Spot Film Device. The
correction, when the parking position is 5 mm (0.2") from the bottom, is carried out
automatically by the SW that increases the measurements reported in tables by 15
mm (0.6").
Note that it is possible to store a new negative or positive offset value (cell 219) to compensate
the differences due to manufacturing or operating characteristics. This offset will permit to
modify all runs of all subdivisions of the stored quantity.
The formulas applied to determine the runs are as follows:
• Full size
C = (cassette width / 2) – 711
where 711 = 227 + 484
• Subdivision 2 in line and 4 cross
C = full size run +/- (film / 4)
• Subdivision 3 in line and 6 cross
C = full size run +/- (film / 3)
• Subdivision 4 in line
C = full size run +/- (3/8 film) and (1/8 film)

Rev. 2
Table cassette run for cassettes in cm
13x18 18x13 18x24 24x18 24x24 24x30 30x24 30x30 18x43 43x18 15x40 40x15 20x40 40x20 30x35 35x30 30x40 40x30 35x35 35x43 43x35
43x3 5
461 462 463 466 466 469 472 478 463 512 531 532 518 521 478 500 484 490 5 00 506 512
F ULL SIZE
(600.8) (576.0) (576.0) (547.0) (547.0) (547.0) (516.5) (516.5) (575.0) (450.7) (590.5) (466.5) (565.0) (467.0) (516.5) (489.3) (517.0) (467.0) (489.0) (489.3) (451.3)
464 467 467 470 473 479 513 533 519 522 479 501 485 491 501 507 513
(531.0) (486.5) (486.5) (490.0) (442.0) (441.5) (343.5) (367.0) (517.5) (367.0) (441.5) (400.0) (442.5) (367.5) (400.0) (400.0) (342.5)
S UBDIV . 2 L
465 468 468 471 474 480 514 534 520 523 480 502 486 492 502 508 514
(620.0) (606.0) (606.0) (607.5) (592.0) (591.5) (557.5) (567.0) (617.5) (567.0) (591.5) (577.0) (592.0) (565.5) (577.0) (577.0) (557.0)
475 481 515 535 524 481 503 487 493 503 509 515
(415.0) (416.5) (307.7) (335.0) (335.0) (416.5) (370.5) (417.7) (334.3) (370.5) (370.5) (308.0)
476 482 516 536 525 482 504 488 494 504 510 516
S UBDIV . 3 L
(516.0) (516.5) (450.5) (466.5) (466.5) (516.5) (487.5) (517.0) (467.0) (487.5) (487.5) (451.5)
477 483 517 537 526 483 505 489 495 505 511 517
(616.0) (616.3) (592.0) (599.0) (599.0) (616.3) (606.3) (615.5) (599.0) (606.3) (606.3) (593.8)
538 527 496 665
(317.0) (317.0) (316.6) (287.8)
539 528 497 666
(417.3) (417.0) (417.3) (395.2)
S UBDIV . 4 L
540 529 498 667
(516.0) (516.0) (515.0) (502.8)
541 530 499 668
(614.5) (614.5) (617.2) (610.2)
464 467 473
(530.0) (486.5) (442.0)
465 468 474
D IV. 4 C (622.0) (606.0) (592.0)
(O PTIONAL ) 464 467 473
(530.0) (486.5) (442.0)
465
465 468 474
(620.0) (606.0) (592.0)
475
(415.0)
476
(516.0)
477
D IV. 6 C (616.0)
(O PTIONAL ) 475
(415.0)
476
(516.0)
477
(616.0)

Rev. 2
Table cassette run for cassettes in inches
5x7 7x5 8x10 10x8 9.5x9.5 10x12 12x10 7x17 17x7 11x14 14x11 14x14 14x17 17x14
571 572 573 576 588 579 582 628 629 594 600 610 616 622
F ULL SIZE
(602.0) (577.0) (563.5) (540.8) (546.0) (538.8) (514.0) (577.0) (449.0) (524.5) (486.0) (488.0) (488.0) (449.5)
574 577 589 580 583 630 595 601 611 6 17 623
(513.6) (476.8) (485.5) (576.7) (438.3) (342.0) (456.3) (397.5) (399.2) (399.3) (341.5)
S UBDIV . 2 L
575 578 590 581 584 631 596 602 612 618 624
(613.0) (601.5) (606.0) (601.0) (589.0) (556.0) (596.3) (575.5) (578.0) (578.0) (557.4)
591 585 632 597 603 613 6 19 625
(466.5) (414.5) (306.4) (432.0) (371.0) (369.5) (369.5) (306.4)
592 586 633 598 604 614 620 626
S UBDIV . 3 L
(546.6) (514.5) (449.5) (524.5) (486.0) (488.0) (488.0) (449.4)
593 587 634 599 605 615 621 627
(626.0) (613.5) (591.5) (617.0) (603.5) (606.0) (606.0) (592.4)
635 606
(288.0) (353.0)
636 607
(396.0) (440.5)
S UBDIV . 4 L
637 608
(503.3) (529.5)
638 609
(609.5) (618.3)
574 583
(512.0) (436.3)
575 584
D IV. 4 C (613.0) (587.0)
(O PTIONAL ) 5 74 583
(511.0) (435.0)
575 584
(612.0) (587.3)
585
(412.5)
586
(512.5)
D IV. 6 C 587
(O PTIONAL ) (611.5)
585
(411.2)
586
(510.7)

Rev. 2
11.3.4.2 Calculation of the shutters run
The calculation is based on the typical measures of the Spot Film Device reported below:
• film-shutter high distance
• film-shutter low distance
• film-shutters average distance
• minimum source - film distance
• maximum source - film distance.
The origin position for the calculation of all runs is the one relative to the calibration of the
shutters minimum potentiometer, i.e. when the shutters are wide open.
As to line subdivisions, this position is equal to a 475 mm opening, therefore to obtain an
opening equal to 0 mm the shutters will have to move of 475/2 mm.
For cross subdivisions (optional), the window opening start will require a run equal to
(475/2)+180=417.5 mm., where 180 mm is the width of the small shutter.
Therefore to obtain an opening equal to 0 mm for cross subdivisions, the shutters will have to
move of 417.5 mm.
In the calculation of the formats to limit, the values KG (exposure correction), calculated with
min SID will be used.
This allows to obtain a separation line between 2 adjacent radiograms with min SID and a
thicker line with higher SIDs.
Should a KG be used, calculated with SID greater than the min, the obtained separation lines
would be too thin or radiograms would overlap in case of SIDs smaller that the one used for
the KG calculation.
• Calculation of the constant of exposure subdivisions correction (KG)

KG = source-shutters distance / source-film distance
• Calculation shutters opening in Full size
Format to limit in full size mode = (Film + 2) * KG
where:
2 = measure in mm in addition to the format to ensure the X-rays cover the film
completely
• Calculation of the opening for Subdivision
Subdivision format = ([(Film - (2 * N.div)] / N.div) * KG
• Dimension of the shutter run for subdivisions in line
Run = (426 / 2) - (Fsubdiv / 2)
• Dimension of the shutter run for cross subdivisions
Run = 393 + (Fsubdiv / 2)

Rev. 2
Table shutters opening for cassettes subdivisions cm.
D IMENSION CASSETTE WIDTH

WI DTH
13 15 18 20 24 30 35 40 43
542 565 543 563 546 548 557 553 560

F ULL SIZE
(131.2) (153.0) (183.5) (200.0) (240.0) (301.0) (353.8) (401.0) (431.0)
S UBDIV . 544 564 547 549 558 554 561

2L (87.0) (96.0) (117.0) (148.5) (172.5) (194.2) (210.0)
S UBDIV . 551 559 555 562

3L (99.0) (114.8) (127.8) (139.0)
S UBDIV . 556 669

4L (96.1) (103.5)
DIV. 4 C
545 566 550
(OPTIONAL
(86.0) (118.0) (147.5)
)
DIV. 6 C
552
(OPTIONAL
(97.0)
)
Table shutters opening for cassettes

cassette s subdivisions inches
D IMENSION CASSETTE WIDTH

WI DTH
5 7 8 9.5 10 11 12 14 17
639 660 640 650 643 653 645 656 661

F ULL SIZE
(132.2) (182.4) (205.0) (243.0) (256.0) (280.0) (308.0) (360.0) (431.0)
S UBDIV . 641 651 644 654 646 657 662

2L (98.0) (115.5) (124.2) (136.2) (149.0) (176.8) (210.0)
S UBDIV . 652 655 648 658 663

3L (78.0) (89.4) (99.3) (115.0) (139.0)
S UBDIV . 659 664

4L (85.6) (103.5)
DIV. 4 C
642 647
(OPTIONAL
(100.0) (149.0)
)
DIV. 6 C
649
(OPTIONAL
(100.0)
)

Rev. 2
11.3.5 Safety aspects for PDI-

PDI - controlled movements
In case the PDI value generated by the software and sent to the motors' activation differs
from the feedback speed supplied by the potentiometers or by the encoders, the system must
be able to recognise this effect and therefore bring the equipment to a halt.
This inconvenient may be caused by a mechanical hardening or by a gear slippage at the
potentiometer.
For each of the PDI-controlled movements, 2 values determine the variance amount between
PDI and speed, and the time beyond which this variance triggers an alarm:
• Variance time
It is expressed in seconds and it allows to mask possible spikes of the value of the PDI
value determined by friction or typical momentum of inertia at the start.
In case a real problem occurs, this time will increase depending on the amount of
movement performed before an alarm is issued.
• K factor
This factor divides the PDI (PDI/k) value.
The software performs a comparison between the speed value and the PDI / k value.
Since k is the denominator of the fraction, the greater k will be the smaller the result of
the fraction will be.
As the alarm is issued if PDI/k > speed, the smaller is the PDI/k value the more a
mechanically "rigid" movement will be accepted without issuing any alarm.
By and large, the greater are the time values and k, which are set for each movement, the
more the movement will accept "hardening", allowing a non-controlled wide movement
before issuing an alarm.
Angulation movement
Cell Function Unit Default Setting

671 PDI subdivision factor 8000
672 Diagnosis delay sec 1.0
Scan movement

673 PDI subdivision factor 8000
674

Rev. 2
Tilting movement

675 PID subdivision factor 8000
Longitudinal tabletop movement

Shutters movement

Cassette feeding movement

682
68 2 Diagnosis delay sec 1.0
Cross subdivision movement (Optional)


Rev. 2
11.4 Position 701 – EEprom copy

This program permits to make a copy from EEprom.
This component stores all data necessary to the functioning of the equipment.
At every start these data are loaded in the RAM.
If for safety reasons, you need to copy these data on a spare backup EEprom, please follow the
procedure below:
1. Power OFF the equipment and position DIP-switches 1 and 3 on ON.
2. Turn ON the equipment.
The following will be displayed on the touch screen:
Mode
SERVICE
Copy
Data copy EEPROM-RAM

Rev. 2
Copy
3. Press the key; the display will show a numerical keyboard asking to
insert the access key:
Enter Key 1 2 3
4 5 6
ESC 7 8 9
C 0 -
.
ESC
5. Press key (Enter) to confirm or to exit; on the "insert address key" area, the
display will show the message:
<< KEY OK >>
C
In this case, press key (Clear) on the numerical keyboard and digit again the access
code. Confirm with key (Enter).
Copy
6. When the access to the copy program is enabled, press the key; the
data copy from EEprom to RAM will start.
The following message is displayed:
<< Data transfer >>
After a few seconds, if the process has been completed successfully and no alarms are
issued, the following message is displayed:
<< Transfer completed. Switch off >>
7. At this point, power OFF the equipment, replace the EEprom with an identical component
on which you might want to store all functional data of the equipment.

Rev. 2
8. Power the equipment back ON. The following will be displayed:
Mode
SERVICE
Copy
Data copy RAM-EEPROM
Copy
Press the key, the data will be stored on the new EEprom.
The equipment can now be used with a spare EEprom that contains all functional data.

Rev. 2
11.5 Position 711 – Clock settings and reset alarm memory

Positions from 711 to 719 are used to set the date and time stored in the RAM.
Date and time are used as they will be associated to the alarms that might be issued. For a
correct interpretation of the alarms memory, it is imperative that date and time are correct.
Besides, it is also possible to reset the "alarms log" in the Flash Eprom.
Once the access and correction procedure for position 711 has been performed (see chapter 11),
the touch screen will shows:
Mode
CELL SERVICE
DD dd MM mm YYYY yy
711: Date
By pressing the and scrolling keys it is possible to increase and decrease the cell to
be displayed, respectively.
CELL
The cell number can also be selected by pressing key and digit the
number to be accessed on the displayed alphanumerical keyboard.

Rev. 2
The following positions are shown:

− 712: Year setting
− 713: Month setting
− 714: Day setting
− 715: Hour setting
− 716:
716: Minutes setting
− 717: Seconds setting
The last position of this group is the following:

− 719: Reset alarm memory
Acting on this cell, the alarm memory stored in the Flash eprom will be reset.
This resetting operation can be useful after the equipment maintenance.
1. Press on the area of the selected cell and hold it down for 1 sec; the display will show a
numerical keyboard asking to insert the access key:
Enter Key 1 2 3
4 5 6
ESC 7 8 9
C 0 -
.
Note
each start-up.

Rev. 2
ESC
display will show the message:
<< KEY OK >>
that indicates that it is possible to access groups 100-300-400, thanks to the use of the
code that has just been keyed in, in function of which switches are positioned at ON.
C
In this case, press key (Clear) on the numerical keyboard and digit again the access
code. Confirm with key (Enter).
4. The display returns to the position of the previously selected cell.
5. To modify the data, press on the area of the selected cell and hold it down for 1 sec. For
cells from 712 to 718, where a digit entering is required, a numerical keyboard will be
displayed.
6. By using the numeric keys key in the data required and press the key (Enter) to
ESC
confirm the correction or to exit.

Rev. 2
11.6 Position 721 – Test Spot Film Device and table life
The Apollo EZ table is set to perform cyclic movement tests.
These tests are useful when checking the movements for correct functioning under stress
conditions.
It is possible to perform tests for the Spot Film Device or table movements.
After performing the access procedure (see chapter 11), the following will be displayed:
Mode
LIFE TEST SERVICE
TEST S.F.D
TEST TABLE
By keying in the access code relative to this position, it will be possible to select the type of
TEST S.F.D
test to be performed by pressing key for the Spot Film Device test
TEST TABLE
or key for the Table test.

Rev. 2
11.6.1 Spot Film Device test

t est
The Spot Film Device perform the initialisation procedure after which the following message is
displayed:
"Load cassette 30x24"
By loading the cassette correctly, the cyclic test begins and the following is displayed:
Mode
SERVICE
XXXX YYYY
722: Num. cycles - Num. exp.
A test cycle is structured in a way that the following positionings are carried out:
Cassette position Shutters and collimator position

Park 4th field I.I. (cell 217)
Program: 30 Full size Full size 43
Park Max I.I. (cell 216)
Program: 30/2 30/2
Park Medium I.I. (cell 215)
Park Min I.I. (cell 214)
Program: 30/3 30/3
Park 4th field I.I. (cell 217)

Rev. 2
Cassette position Shutters and collimator position

Park Max I.I. (cell 216)
Program: 40/4 (line) 40/4 (line)
Park Medium I.I. (cell 215)
Park Min I.I. (cell 214)
Program: 30/4 (cross) 30/4 (cross)
In the Full size modality, the shutters position themselves on size 43 rather than on size 30 to
carry out the maximum possible run.
Program 40/4 in line is carried out with cassette 30 as the program 4 in line for cassette 30 is
not available.
Every time the cassette is put in the parking position, the following outputs are enabled:
• fluoro request
• CCD output in rotation
• I.I. field output in rotation.
Every time the cassette is directed towards the exposure position:

• the prep., digital prep, II step, exposure outputs are enabled
• the grid oscillates for 1 sec.
Warning
As the outputs for the system accessories are enabled, before starting the Spot Film
Device test, make sure that the accessories linked to the Apollo EZ table are not
powered.
At the end of each program the cassette is ejected, the cassette guides are open and closed
again until they block the cassette.
At the end of a complete cycle (as described in the table), before resuming with what described
up until now, the following occurs:
• the grid movement as far as the parking position and return to field
• all outputs are turned on
• the collimator lamp lights up for 5 secs.
On the display the number of exposures increases each time the cassette position itself in the
X-ray field, so is the number of cycles every time a complete cycle is performed.
A complete cycle consists of 17 cassette positions.
The number of exposures can be modified by pressing on the area of the selected cell and hold
it down for 1 second to enable the correction and by keying in the desired number by means of
the numerical keyboard (see chapter 11 – Data Entry procedure).

Rev. 2
11.6.2 Table
Tabl e test
The table will cyclically perform movements that allow to check the correct functioning of the
various parts.
Warning
As the movements are activated automatically without opening the SF circuit, during
this test, the supervisor is disabled. Therefore its K3 ready relay does not close. In
order to perform the test, make a jumper on the connector X47 between pins 6
and 7.
Remove the jumper at the end of the test.
Warning
The test is conceived in such a way to limit the movements in case collisions occur.
Nonetheless pay always attention during automatic movements performed by
this program. Particularly during the first cycle, stay close to the emergency red
button and be ready to activate it if any risk condition occurs.
The following will be displayed:
Mode
SERVICE
YYYY
723: Table life test - Number cycles

Rev. 2
Before starting the proper test cycle, the table goes into the default position with the following
settings:
• Minimum SID
• longitudinal tabletop centred
• transversal tabletop centred
• 0° angulation
• scan in the middle
• Compressor in parking position
• 0° tilting
Should in this phase a collision condition occur, the cycle is interrupted and the following
message is displayed:
"Cycle interrupted due to collision"
The equipment needs to be powered off, the life test interrupted and the table positioned in a
way such that no condition of collision occurs when the default position is in the process of
being reached.
A test will be divided into two cycles so that more movements may be executed simultaneously
in the same cycle.
The following movements will be performed in the first cycle (A

A ):
• compressor down;
down with the limit reached, the movement will reverse the direction back
up to the maximum position.
• angulation towards the head,
head inversion until feet end of run and return to 0°
• movement of the longitudinal tabletop,
tabletop in the 4-way version, towards the head
simultaneously with the inward movement of the transversal tabletop. When the limit is
reached, the movements invert their direction until they reach the scan and LT feet side
and external table end of run. Return of both movements to the centre.
The following movements will be performed in the second cycle (B

B ):
• SID up;
up when the limit is reached, the movements invert the direction until they bring
themselves back with minimum SID.
• scan movement towards head; head with the limits reached the movement reverse the
direction until reaching the scan feet side end run. Return of both movements to the
centre.
• tilting towards Trendelemburg,
Trendelemburg movement inversion till reaching the vertical end of run,
then return to 0°.
At the end of the tilting movement, the number of cycles increases by one unit and the cycle
picks up again with the SID and compressor movement.

Rev. 2
The following table summarises the movements of the two cycles:
Movement Default pos. Cycle A Cycle B

Compressor Up Down → Up
SID Minimum Up → Down
Angulation 0° -40° → +40° → 0°
Scan Centred In → Out → Centred
Transversal Centred In → Out → Centred
tabletop
Longitudinal Centred Head → Feet → Centred
tabletop
Tilting 0° -30° → +90° → 0°
Cycle No. counter increase
The number of exposures can be modified by pressing on the area of the selected cell and hold
it down for 1 second to enable the correction and by keying in the desired number by means of
the numerical keyboard (see chapter 11 – Data Entry procedure).
In case the room where the table is installed is of dimensions such that the complete excursion
of some movement is not possible, the test will stop the movement in proximity of the collision
limit.

Rev. 2
11.7 Position 751 – Alarms memory

The issued alarm storage function permits to recreate the equipment history allowing the
identification of anomalies or failures.
This archive is structured in such a way that the occurred diagnosis are temporarily stored in
the RAM, every 10 minutes the RAM "uploads" these data in the Flash Eprom which, in turn,
stores them permanently.
The Flash Eprom memory can store 100 diagnosis that are stored in progressive order with the
LIFO system (last in, first out). The diagnosis with number 1 will therefore be the most recent
to be moved to position 2, 3, 4 etc. from the following ones. Diagnosis 100 is deleted when
another diagnosis is stored.
The last 20 diagnosis, those marked by positions from 1 to 20 are in the long format, i.e. they
take one page each (Figure 11-1).

Rev. 2
Mode
ALARM HISTORY SERVICE
Line 1 N° alarm a Diagnosis b c+d
Line 2 Angul. e Scan f Tilt g Tab. Long. h SID i Tab. Trans. j
Line 3 Grid 1 k Jaws l Cross Div. m Shutters n Grid 2 o Coll. Width p
Line 4 Coll. Height q Cass. Width r Cass. Height s Division t N. Expos. u Compr. Cone v
Line 5 Compr. down w Funct. z
Line 6 collim XXXX angcmp XXXX tltsid XXXX ltbzrf XXXX scnttb XXXX center XXXX
Line 7 fluo XX prep XX expo X
Line 8 A XXXXXXXX B XXXXXXXX C XXXXXXXX D XXXXXXXX E XXXXXXXX F XXXXXXXX
Line 9 G XXXXXXXX H XXXXXXXX I XXXXXXXX
Line 10 L XXXXXXXX M XXXXXXXX N XXXXXXXX P XXXXXXXX Q XXXXXXXX R XXXXXXXX
Line 11 S XXXXXXXX T XXXXXXXX U XXXXXXXX
Figure 11-1: Alarm message in long format

Rev. 2
Line 1: Alarms data

a diagnosis position in the memory (from 1 to 20)
b diagnosis code
c+d diagnosis memorisation date (dd-mm-yy) and hour (hh-mm)
Line 2: Table positions

e column angle in degrees
f scan position with respect to the centre in mm (negative head side)
g tilting angle in degrees
h position of the ppp longitudinal movement with respect to the centre in mm (negative left side)
i source to film distance in mm
j position of the ppp transversal movement with respect to the centre in mm (negative internal side)
Line 3: Spot
Spo t Film Device
k distance grid 1 from minimum SW (parking side) in mm
l gripping opening in mm
m cross.div trolley position from centre in mm
n shutters opening dimension in mm
o distance grid 2 from minimum SW (parking side) in mm
p film level limitation dimension for width collimator in cm
Note: If ERR is displayed in one of the fields relative to a potmeter, when the error occurs, it means that the potmeter was out of range

Rev. 2
Line 4: Selections
q film level limitation dimension for height collimator in cm
r cassette width size
s cassette height size
t selected cassette subdivision program
u number of subdivisions still available
v compressor present = 1 not present = 0
Line 5: Selections
w compressor in field = 1 in park = 0
selected modality: 0 = direct 1 = spot film device 2 = digital
z
3 = tomo spot film device 4 = tomo digital 5 = angio
Note: If ERR is displayed in one of the fields relative to a potmeter, when the error occurs, it means that the potmeter was out of range

Rev. 2
Line 6: Joystick positions

↑ ← ↓ →
Joystick function 1° digit 2° digit 3° digit 4° digit
1xxx x1xx xx1x xxx1
collim Collimator height open width close height close width open
angcmp Angulation – Compressor compressor up angulation head side compresson down angulation feed side
tltsid Tilting – SID tilting
SID up SID down tilting vertical
trendelenbourg
ltb
lt b zrf Long.Tabletop (*) –
function long,tabletop left 0 equipment long,tabletop right
Function – 0 equipment
scnttb Scan – Trans.Tabletop (*) trans.tabletop in scan head side trans.tabletop out scan feet side
center Automatic centering tilting angulation trans.tabletop long.tabletop
(*) Table view
Note: The value 0 means that the joystick is idle, value 1 means that that control was active at the moment when the diagnosis occurred
Line 7: Buttons positions

fluo 0/1 prep
prep 0/1 expo 0/1
Note: The value 0 means that the button is idle, value 1 means that that button was active at the moment when the diagnosis occurred

Rev. 2
Line 8: Display digital inputs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A X X X X X X X X
1 Tubehead at 0° 1 Emergency table 1 Spare

2 Compressor end-switch: up 2 Spare 2 Spare
3 Compressor end-switch: down 3 Spare 3 Single Fault input
4 Compressor end-switch: cone mounted 4 Compressor movement input signal 4 X-rays generator ready
A 5 Spare B 5 Spare C 5 X-rays ON
6 Spare 6 Spare 6 Working place selection: digital
7 Spare 7 Spare 7 Working place selection: SFD
8 Tubehead at 180° 8 Spare 8 Tube ceiling suspension safety
1 External safety barrier 1 Inverters relay input OK 1 Tilt button: foot side (vertical)
2 Spare 2 Photocell: cassette present 2 Tilt button: head side (Trendelenbourg)
3 Cassette present in the Wall Bucky 3 Photocell: cassette width 3 Tilt button: centering
4 Single Fault circuit check 4 Safety anti-trapping alarm 4 Longitudinal tabletop button: foot side
D 5
Transversal tabletop safety barrier
check
E 5 Cassette pressure switch F 5 Longitudinal tabletop button: head side
6 Spare 6 Safety anti-trapping control enable 6 Scanning button: head side
7 Tilting/angulation inverter enable 7 Collimator button: light 7 Scanning button: foot side
8 Scanning inverter enable 8 Cassette insert/eject command 8 Angulation button: head side
NOTE: The display of the inputs referred to the switches is =1 when the switch is in the NC position and therefore the input is at 0 V. As to inputs from
external accessories, 0 means disabled input, 1 enabled input.

Rev. 2
Line 9: Display digital inputs and collimator commands
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
G X X X X X X X X
Motor overcurrent alarm: cassette belt

1 Angulation button: foot side 1 1 Scanning head side
RR
Motor overcurrent alarm: cassette belt
2 Angulation button: centering 2 2 Scanning foot side
LL
Motor overcurrent alarm: shutters
3 Transversal tabletop button: inside 3 3 Transversal tabletop outside
limiters (*)
G 4 Transversal tabletop button: outside
H 4
Motor overcurrent alarm: cross I 4 Transversal tabletop inside
subdivision (**)
5 Transversal tabletop button: centering 5 Program selection: switch 1 5 Angulation head side
6 SID button: up 6 Program selection: switch 2 6 Angulation foot side
7 SID button: down 7 Program selection: switch 3 7 Transversal tabletop centering
8 Spare 8 Program selection: switch 4 8 Angulation centering
(*) For Dual Grid version = Grid 2: motor overcurrent alarm
(**) For Dual Grid version = Spare
NOTE: The display of the inputs referred to the switches is =1 when the switch is in the NC position and therefore the input is at 0 V. As to inputs from external
accessories, 0 means disabled input, 1 enabled input.

Rev. 2
Line 10:
10 : Display digital outputs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
L X X X X X X X X
1 Angulation power relay: enable 1 Spare 1 Power relay enable: tilting

Power relay enable: scanning/longitudinal
2 Spare 2 Spare 2
tabletop
3 Monitor image rotation: horizontal 3 Motor power enable: SID up 3 Transversal tabletop motor power: inside
L 4
5
Monitor image rotation: vertical
I.I. size: maximum
M 4
5
Motor power enable: SID down
Motor break: tilting
N 4
5
Transversal tabletop motor power: outside
Compressor power motor: up
6 I.I. size: medium 6 Spare 6 Compressor power motor: down
7 I.I. size: minimum 7 Motor break: angulation 7 Spare
8 Ready power relay: enable 8 Motor break: scanning 8 Spare
1 Spare 1 Inverter tilting/angulation: forward 1 Fluoro exam request
2 Spare 2 Inverter tilting/angulation: reverse 2 Do exposure request
3 Spare 3 Inverter scanning: forward 3 Preparation request: normal
4 Spare 4 Inverter scanning: reverse 4 Preparation request: digital
P 5 Spare Q 5 Spare R 5 Second step request
6 Spare 6 Spare 6 Tomography 1st speed
7 Spare 7 Tomography 2nd speed 7 Tomography 4th speed
8 Spare 8 Tomography 3rd speed 8 Tomography 07° angle
NOTE: The display of the outputs referred to the switches is =1 when the switch is in the NC position and therefore the output is at 0 V.

Rev. 2
Line 11:
11 : Display digital outputs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
S X X X X X X X X
1 Tomography 20° angle 1 Spare 1 Cassette belt RR forward/reverse

2 Tomography 30° angle 2 CCD x 0 filter / ROI display setup 2 Cassette belt LL forward/reverse
3 Tomography 45° angle 3 CCD x 4 filter 3 Shutters limiters forward/reverse (*)
4 Alarm: X-rays doing without request 4 CCD x 8 filter 4 Cross subdivision forward/reverse (**)
S 5
6
Automatic/manual kV for fluoro exam
Inverter longitudinal tabletop: forward
T 5
6
Grid 1 motor: in field
Grid 1 motor: in park
U 5
6
Motor power disable: cassette belt RR
Motor power disable: cassette belt LL
Motor power disable: shutters limiters
7 Inverter longitudinal tabletop: reverse 7 Gripping motor: open 7
(***)
8 Spare 8 Gripping motor: close 8 Motor power disable: cross subdivision (**)
(*) For Dual Grid version = Grid 2: forward/reverse
(**) For Dual Grid version = Spare
(***) For Dual Grid version = Grid 2: motor power disable
NOTE: The display of the outputs referred to the switches is =1 when the switch is in the NC position and therefore the output is at 0 V.

Rev. 2
When the diagnosis is moved - as a result of the most recent ones being introduced - to a memory position between 21 and 100, the view is reduced
and occupies one single line.
Because the view (page) consists of 2 lines, only 2 diagnosis at a time will be displayed.
The reduced diagnosis are displayed as follows:
Mode
ALARM HISTORY SHORT MODE SERVICE
Line 1 N° alarm a Diagnosis b c+d
Line 2 N° alarm e Diagnosis f g+h
Figura 11-2: Alarm message in short format

Line 1
a diagnosis position in the memory (from 21 to 100 odd numbers)
b diagnosis code
c+d diagnosis memorisation date (dd-mm-yy) and hour (hh-mm)
Line 2
e diagnosis position in the memory (from 22 to 100 even numbers)
f diagnosis code
g+h diagnosis memorisation date (dd-mm-yy) and hour (hh-mm)

Rev. 2
11.8 Position 850 – Table cycles memory

The Apollo EZ table stores the activation times of the various movements besides the number
of exposures.
This memorisation permits to check the wear and tear of the various parts with respect to the
working time, and permits to evaluate whether preventative maintenance is necessary.
The 8-digit exposure number increases each time an exposure is carried out. This holds for the
Spot Film Device, digital and direct modality.
The activation of all other movements is displayed as number of activation, hours and minutes.
The exposure are displayed in numbers.
In the same way as for the alarm memorisation, data are stored temporarily in the RAM and
are permanently stored in the Flash Eprom every 10 minutes.
Following is a representation of the view relative to this group (Figure 11-3).

Rev. 2

Rev. 2
Mode
COUNTERS PAGE SERVICE
Line 1 Exposures A Fluoro B b
Line 2 Angul C c Scan D d Tilt E e
Line 3 Tab. Long. F f SID G g Tab. Trans. H h
Line 4 Compress. I i Grid 1 L l Jaws M m
Line 5 Cross Div. N n Limit. O o Cassette P p
Line 6 Grid 2 Q q
Figure 11-3: Table cycles memory

Rev. 2
Line 1
A number of exposures (all modalities SFD–DIG–DIR)
B number of fluoroscopy activation (all modalities SFD–DIG–DIR)
b fluoroscopy activation time (hours | minutes)
Line 2
C number of angulation motor movement activation
c activation time angulation motor movement (hours | minutes)
D number of scan motor movement activation
d activation time scan motor movement (hours | minutes)
E number of tilting motor movement activation
e activation time tilting motor movement (hours | minutes)
Line 3
F number of longitudinal tabletop motor movement activation
f activation time longitudinal tabletop motor movement (hours | minutes)
G number of SID motor movement activation
g activation time SID motor movement (hours | minutes)
H number of transversal tabletop motor movement activation
h activation time transversal tabletop motor movement (hours | minutes)

Rev. 2
Line 4
I number of compressor motor movement activation
i activation time compressor motor movement (hours | minutes)
L number of grid 1 motor movement activation
l activation time grid 1 motor movement (hours | minutes)
M number of cassette close motor movement activation
m activation time cassette close motor movement (hours | minutes)
Line 5
N number of cross subdivision motor movement activation
n activation time cross subdivision motor movement (hours | minutes)
O number of shutters motor movement activation
o activation time shutters motor movement (hours | minutes)
P number of motors R and L belts cassette movement activation
p activation time motors R and L belts cassette movement (hours | minutes)
Line 6
Q number of grid 2 motor movement activation
q activation time grid 2 motor movement (hours | minutes)

Rev. 2

Service Manual – Single fault operating logic
Rev. 2
12 SINGLE FAULT OPERATING

OPERATI NG LOGIC
The scope of the Single Fault is a redundant check on the activation circuits of the table
movements, i.e. those functions that may be dangerous to the patient if they are not under
control.
This safety measure is devised in such as way that, if a single fault at a time occurs (hence the
term Single Fault), to the various levels of the chain the movement consists of, the system can
identify the fault and take the appropriate action that brings the movement to an immediate
halt.
The movements of:

• tilting
• angulation
• scan
• transversal tabletop movement
• source to film distance (SID)
• compressor
which are present on the remote-controlled table comply with the above-described SF safety
measures.
All controls relative to the above-listed movements, which are present on both on the console
and on the double control, together with the fluoro and X-ray preparation movements, which
are present on the pedal or on the button, can be realised with a double microswitch ( S).
The first S is connected on the open contact (NA) and will be responsible for the movement
request.
The second is connected to a closed contact (NC) and is in a sequence with all second Ss that
feature the SF safety function.
The connection permits to have a single wire that is send to an input that serves both the
main processor and the supervisor.
The control logic bases the SF control on the correspondence of the SF circuit and of the
movements request.
Both conditions must be fulfilled in order to guarantee the activation of the movement (SF
circuit open, movements request circuit close).
Moreover, thanks to the feedback of the potentiometers of each "movement group", the main
processor is able to recognise if a movement is active without the need of an active request.
To complete the redundant checks on all levels, a second processor called supervisor is
connected via serial and parallel port (on the above-listed movements outputs) to the main
processor.
This permits to check a possible malfunctioning of the main processor that will have to manage
in a consistent way the serial and parallel data to the output ports.
2 relays called ready relays (K2 and K3) are controlled each by a processor and the contact are
connected in series.
The series of contacts interrupts the supply of the magnetic switch that supplies the power
circuits. If any anomaly is detected, one or both processors stop exciting the relative relay and
interrupt immediately any movement.
Thanks to such HW and SW logic, each part responsible for the movement is monitored and if a
failure on the movement activation circuit occurs, the system can detect and interrupt the
movement itself generating issuing an alarm.

Service Manual – Single fault operating logic
Rev. 2

Service Manual – Functionality
Rev. 2
13 FUNCTIONALITY
13.1 Collision
When activating one or more movements, one part of the equipment might reach the safety
limit beyond which a collision with the walls, the ceiling or the floor might occur.
This limit, set by means of group 200 cells, represents an imaginary insuperable software
barrier beyond which it is impossible to move from any part of the equipment.
When a part of the equipment reaches this limit, the movement that determined this situation
is stopped.
The message LIMIT REACHED is displayed until the activation of a control that informs the
operator that some movements might be disabled.
The parts of the table that can collide with walls, floor or ceiling are: the image intensifier, the
extremities of the main beam (corresponding to the extremities of the tabletop), the tube-
collimator group, the angulation motor and the tabletop in the case of 4-way version.
When one of these parts reaches such limit, movements commands that can bring the element
into collision are suddenly inhibited. On the other hand, movements commands that can bring
the elements away from the collision point are free.
In the case of 4-way version, if the collision limits with the floor are reached during tilting, the
SW will have to manage the return of the tabletop scan assembly maintaining the centre of the
patient unaltered.
Following are tables with the representations of the various conditions.
In the first pair of columns are indicated the angles in which the table (TILT) or the column
(ANG) could find themselves when the limit is reached.
"0" referred to the tilting means that the table is in the horizontal position, " +" indicates that
the table is inclined towards the vertical position and " -" that the table is inclined towards the
Trendelemburg.
"0" referred to the angulation indicates that the column is perpendicular to the table, " +"
indicates that the column is inclined towards the feet and " - " that it is inclined towards the
head.
The YES cells indicate that the movement is free, while the NO cells indicated that the
movement is inhibited.
The grey cells indicate that the potential collision will never occur for that particular
combination of tilting angle and angulation angle.

Rev. 2
Table showing movements allowed for tube – right wall collision
ANGLES S CAN A NGULATION T ILT SID

TILT ANG HEAD FEET HEAD FEET TREND VERT UP DOWN
0 0
0 + YES NO YES NO YES NO NO YES
0 -
+ 0 YES NO YES NO (*1*) (*2*) NO YES
- 0
YES NO NO YES (*1*) (*2*) NO YES
+ +
YES NO YES NO (*1*) (*2*) NO YES
+ - YES NO YES NO (*1*) (*2*) NO YES
- + YES NO YES NO YES NO NO YES
- -
(*1*) YES if the point of collision is higher than the centre of tilt, otherwise NO
(*2*) YES if the point of collision is lower than the centre of tilt, otherwise NO
Table showing movements allowed for tube

tube – left wall collision

0 0
0 +
0 - NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES
+ 0
- 0 NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES
+ +
+ - NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES
- + NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES
- - NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES

Rev. 2
Table showing movements allowed for tube – ceiling collision

0 0 YES YES YES YES (*3*) (*4*) NO YES
0 + YES YES NO YES (*3*) (*4*) NO YES
0 - YES YES YES NO (*3*) (*4*) NO YES
+ 0 NO YES NO YES (*3*) (*4*) NO YES
- 0 YES NO YES NO (*3*) (*4*) NO YES
+ + NO YES NO YES (*3*) (*4*) NO YES
NO YES YES NO
+ - (*3*) (*4*) NO YES
NO YES NO YES
YES NO YES NO
- + (*3*) (*4*) NO YES
YES NO NO YES
- - YES NO YES NO (*3*) (*4*) NO YES
(*3*) NO if the point of collision is right of the centre of tilt, otherwise YES.
(*4*) YES if the point of collision is right of the centre of tilt, otherwise NO.
Table showing movements allowed for tube – floor collision

0 0
0 +
0 -
+ 0 YES NO YES NO YES NO YES YES
- 0
+ + YES NO YES NO YES NO NO YES
+ - YES NO YES NO YES NO YES YES
- +
- -

Rev. 2
Permitted movements table for Tabletop collision – Right wall
ANGLES LONG TABLETOP T ILT

TILT HEAD FEET TREND VERT
0 YES NO YES YES
+ YES NO NO YES
- YES NO YES NO
Permitted movements
movem ents table for Longitudinal tabletop collision – Left
wall
ANGLES LONG TABLETOP T ILT

0 NO YES YES YES
+ NO YES NO YES
- NO YES YES NO
Permitted movements table for Longitudinal tabletop collision – Ceiling
ANGLES LONG TABLETOP

TABLETOP T ILT
0
+ NO YES YES NO
-

Rev. 2
13.1.1 Safety barrier
In the event the room where the appliance is installed has dimensional characteristics with
irregularities that would require the use of additional safety devices, Apollo EZ is able to protect
itself from collisions against these irregularities.
Depending on individual requirements, devices such as beam photocells or antenna switches
can be installed, which if activated avoid collisions between parts of the equipment and items in
the room.
The connection of these devices should be performed so as to send 0 V to the X0-17 input
when operating conditions are correct. When the device is intercepted, the input must open.
Once the safety device has been activated, the movement in progress stops and the display
shows the message:
<< LIMIT BARRIER >>
accompanied by an intermittent audible signal.
To exit from this condition and restore the normal functioning of the appliance, the movement
opposed to that which was present when the "limit barrier" condition occurred can be
independently activated.
All other commands (console joystick and push buttons on the table) are disabled until the
message "limit barrier" is removed.
If the safety barrier is broken during the following conditions:
• switching on the equipment
• tomo mode access
• angiography mode access
• execution of a Tomographic examination
• execution of an angiography step examination
• reaching a memorised position by means of command "0"
the movement is stopped and any active mode reset.
In this condition none of the joysticks or buttons on the table are active, and therefore to exit
the "limit barrier" condition is necessary to keep pressed at the same time function joystick (F)
together with the joystick of the movement causing the alarm in the opposite direction.
Warning
This procedure can be dangerous for the equipment in as much that an incorrect
manoeuvre could cause the contact of a table part against a part of the room.
Therefore the manoeuvre that will move the table away from the obstacle must be
identify before starting any movement. In any case, always proceed with caution and
activate the movement with brief and intermittent commands.

Rev. 2
13.1.2 Anti-
Anti - entrapment system
The Apollo EZ table is equipped with anti-entrapment circuit to avoid that personnel in the
vicinity become trapped between the tabletop side support during vertical tilting. An additional
circuit is incorporated in this system which blocks the movement in the event the patient is
trapped between the tabletop and the beam or column (standard on 415/480V versions).
If the intervention occurs during one or more movements, no movement will be permitted until
the release of all joysticks that are pushed at the time, except for tilting and angulation that if
pressed in automatic will move of 5 degree in the opposite direction to that at the time of the
intervention.
Once the joysticks are released, if the tapping is freed through the automatic movements, all
movements will be enabled once again. Otherwise it is assumed that trapping is due to the
movement of the transversal tabletop, therefore only that movement will be enabled again in
the opposite direction to that detected when trapping occurred.
If the intervention of the safety device is detected with the machine ON without any
movement active, only tilting movement to the zero Trendelenbourg position will be permitted.

Rev. 2
13.2 Compressor
Com pressor
When the compressor is not in the parking position (i.e. when the high end of run microswitch
is released) and column angulation is within ±15°, if angulation, tabletop or scan movements are
activated, the following will occur:
• the requested movement is not activated
• the compressor goes up for 1.5 sec or until compression force equal to 2 kg.
When one of these conditions is met, the ascent stops and a confirmation acoustic signal
is issued.
Release and push again the movement joystick to activate the desired movement.
The compressor ascent movement is as all Apollo EZ table movements of the "dead man" type,
therefore, if during the compressor ascent the joystick is released, the movement will stop.
By pushing the joystick once again, the ascent is enabled again for a time depending on the
current compression force without taking into account the previous partial ascent.
Only after completion of the ascent, the requested movement will be free.
It will then be possible to move the patient, scan or column without risk and, afterwards,
compress the patient once again.
Note
It is necessary to drive compressor up to park position (compressor has reached the
upper end of run) to angulated the column over the ±15° limits.
When the compressor is not in park position and the column angulation outside ±15°, by
activating the angulation movement, the compressor is taken back to the parking position
(confirmed by an acoustic signal).
Release and push again the movement joystick to activate the desired movement.
The compressor releases the compression by enabling the cone ascent for 240 msecs if the
potmeter exceeds the set dead band.
This happens typically when the patient makes a strong pressure on the cone, such as by
breathing.
Note
Every time the compressor activates the parking switch, the set value of the
compressor force is forced to 5 kg (11 lbs).

Rev. 2
13.3 Collimator
The Apollo EZ table is designed to accept a square field collimator or a square field one with
iris.
The collimator operating modes are described in the User's Manual, paragraph "Collimator".

Rev. 2
13.4 Table automatic positioning

The Apollo EZ table is designed in such a way to allow to store up to three settings for each
user that can be retrieved.
Warning
The storing of the table settings is assigned only to the user currently active (general
user or on of the five users that can be selected).
In the "SETUP" page of the Apollo EZ touch screen console, a key is associated to each of the
storable settings:
Preset position
MODE-1
MODE-2
MODE-3
The 3 conditions are stored in the EEPROM and initialized with default position when the
equipment is shipped from the factory.
The default positions are as follows:

• Tilting at 0°
• Scan in the middle
• Column at 0°
• SID on minimum
• Tabletop in the centre
• Compressor in parking position
• Slow tilting speed
• Tabletop and scan movements orientation according to monitor.

Rev. 2
The positions of the components that will be stored are:

• SID
• Tabletop
• Angulation
• Tube-Spot Film Device scan
• Tilting.
The operating settings to be stored are:

• Tilting speed
• Scan and tabletop movements direction.
To modify the storable setting, position the table as desired, select the tilting speed and
movement orientation depending on the need.
After setting the above-mentioned values, press for 5 seconds the "MODE-X" key you want to
associate with the actual configuration; the following window is displayed:
Change name ' MODE X '
Store ' MODE-X '
Exit
1. Keep the "Change Name 'MODE-X' " key pressed to set the name of the current table
position, using the alphanumeric keypad displayed; confirm with the key (Enter).
2. Store the settings by pressing and holding the "Store ' MODE-X ' " key until the following
message appears:
<< Position stored >>
3. Press the "Exit" key to exit the function.
Note
If the operator has stored positions different from the default ones, by performing
technical maintenance with access to group 100, such memorised velues will be lost.
The same will happen if the EEPROM is replaced.

Rev. 2
To recall a previously stored selection, select an item from the "Preset position" drop down
menu on the main page, then move the joystick down (>0<).
Preset position
MODE-X
The stored positions are reached with contemporary movements, except for the angulation and
tilting axes.
The set tilting speed and movements orientation are also activated.
The following message is displayed when the operation is complete:
<< REACHED POSITIONS >>
Note
A "LIMIT REACHED" condition may occur while the movements are being activated
to reach the desired positions. In this case the procedure with be interrupted. The
component must be manually moved from its critical position and the stored position
recalled again.
When one stored position is selected in the "Preset position" field, the selection is maintained
both during the operating mode and at the start.
The function is inhibited when the angio and tomo modalities are active.

Rev. 2

Service Manual – Operating modes
Rev. 2
14 OPERATING MODES
14.1 Spot Film Device

Input X0-15 is active.
The size of the cassette in the Spot Film Device and the number of possible exposures are
shown on the display once the subdivision program has been selected.
The collimator can be selected in automatic, automatic+hold, or manual mode.
It is possible to carry out investigations in fluoro and in exposure by operating the pedal
commands (standard) or button controls (optional).
The Spot Film Device performs all the cassette-carrying tray, vibration grid and shutter
movements.
These also follow possible reductions carried out by the width axle of the collimator.
It is possible to carry out seriographic investigations with return of the cassette to the park at
the end of every exposure to allow a fluoro investigation or in rapid mode, by performing
sequential exposures.

Rev. 2
14.1.1 "Standard radiography" performance block diagram
• Park cassette
• I.I. or div. shutters
→ ←
• I.I. or div. collimator
Reset
↓ joystick
activation
I step:
• Movement towards posit.
exposure of:
- Cassette
- Shutters
- Collimator
• "Prep. request" out ON
↓ ↑
↑ • Reaching
final position of:
- Cassette NO Alarm
- Shutters → 060 →
- Collimator
within 5 secs.
YES ↓
II step at the generator
NO Alarm
• Input "generat. Ready"
→ 062 →
within 3 secs.
YES ↓
• Grid movement start
• Cell 223 time decrease
↑
• Cell 223 timeout :
"X-ray request" out ON
↓
↑ • "X-ray presence" input NO Alarm
ON within 5 secs. 064 →
YES ↓ ↑
Exposure in progress. I step:
• Pedal release with YES Alarm 067
"X-ray presence" input II step: →
ON Alarm 066
NO ↓ ↑
• "X-ray presence" input YES Alarm
ON after 6.5 secs. 065 →
NO
YES • I and II step release
← with X-ray end time. ←
("X-ray presence" OFF)
NO

Rev. 2
14.1.2 "Rapid sequence" block diagram
• Subdivision and
shutter select. ←
• Park cassette
↓ ↑
I step: Reset
• Movement towards posit. joystick activation
exposure of: alarms
- Cassette
- Shutters ↑
- Collimator
• Progr. aborted
• Tray expelled
• Grid movem. start
↓
• Reaching final
position of: ↑
- Cassette NO Alarm
- Collimator
within 5 secs.
YES ↓
II step at the generator NO Alarm
062 →
within 3 secs.
YES ↓
• "X-ray request" out ON ↑
↓
• "X-ray presence" input NO Alarm
ON within 5 secs. → 064 →
YES ↓ ↑
• "X-ray presence" input
(End X-ray) OFF within: NO Alarm
→ 6.5 sec → 065 →
- "X-ray request" out OFF
YES ↓
Program YES ↑
end → → →
NO ↓ ↑
• Pedal release with YES Alarm
program not end 063 → ↓
NO ↓
↑ • Next Tray ↑
• Out "X-ray request" ON
↓
YES • "X-ray presence" input NO Alarm Tray OUT or
← ON within 5 secs. 064 → park (sel. esp)

Rev. 2
14.2 Standard tomographic

The tomographic mode presents various options: 4 different tomography angles (7, 20, 30, 45)
each of which can be associated with 4 speeds.
The layer can be set with steps of 0.1 cm from a value 0 (tabletop level) to a value of 35.0 cm.
The direction of the tomographic movement can be from left to right or viceversa and the
automatic layer increase function can be selected.
This function automatically increases the level of the layer depending on the angle set while
respecting the "thickness of the cut" as shown below:
• 7° increase 3.0 cm
• 45° increase 0.5 cm.
It is possible to carry out tomography in rapid sequence (sequential tomography).
In this mode all the possible options for standard tomography, the automatic layer increase is
always active.
At the end of the ray angle, the operating mode provides for the immediate departure of the
column for the next tomography.
The exposures will therefore be alternatively from left to right and vice versa.

Rev. 2
14.2.1 "Standard tomography" block diagram

• Tomo ON (ang+speed+div)
• Park cassette
→ • I.I. or div. shutters ←
Centering
↓ joystick
activation
I step:
• Movement towards
exposure position of:
Cassette, Shutters, ↑
Collimator
Reset
• Grid movement start
joystick
• Column towards load
activation
• Out "prep. request." ON
↓
↑ • Reached final position of:
- Cassette NO ↑
Alarm
- Collimator
within 5 secs.
YES ↓
→ 062 →
within 3 secs.
YES ↓
• Column movement Start
↓ ↑
• Column in Tomo angle
• "X-ray request" out ON
↓
YES ↓ ↑
Tomography in progress
• "X-ray presence" input YES Alarm
OFF with column still at → 068 →
Tomo (X-ray request ON)
NO ↓ ↑
• X-ray presence ON for YES
more than 0.7 sec from Alarm
→ →
the end of Tomo (X-ray 069
request OFF)
NO ↓
with column centering
←
ended
↑ NO ↓
YES Centering joystick
← activation. Column at 0°
Rev. 2
14.2.2 "Sequential tomography" block diagram
• Tomo ON (ang+speed+div)
→ • Cassette park ←
Centering joystick
↓
activation
I step:
• Movement towards position
exposure of:
- Cassette, Shutters,
↑
Collimator
• Grid movement start Reset joystick
• Column towards load activation
• "Prep. request." out ON
↓
↑ • Reaching final position of:
- Cassette, Shutters, NO Alarm ↑
Collimator → 060
→
within 5 secs.
YES ↓
• Input "generat.Ready"
→ 062 →
within 3 secs.
YES ↓
• Column movement start

→
↓ ↑
• Out "X-ray request" ON
↓
YES ↓ ↑
Tomography in progress
• "X-ray presence" input OFF YES Alarm
with column still in → 068 →
Tomo (X-ray request ON)
NO ↓ ↑
more than 0.7 sec from the Alarm
→ →
end of Tomo (X-ray request 069
OFF)
NO ↓
NO • Start for next tomography
← X-ray control release
YES ↓
YES • End of sequence with column
← centering ended
↑ NO ↓

Rev. 2
14.3 Direct
Both the X0-14 and X0-15 inputs are deactivated.
The display indicates DIR.
The collimator can only be selected in manual mode.
It is not possible to carry out investigations in fluoro because the fluoro request output
towards the generator is disabled.
It is possible to carry out tests in exposure by operating the pedal commands (standard) or
button controls (optional).
The Spot Film Device in this phase does not perform the cassette-carrying tray movement,
grid vibration and shutters.
The preparation outputs, II step and exposure are sent to the generator and without
conditioning.
Neither the tomography nor the angio step mode can be selected.

Rev. 2
14.4 Digital
This mode is possible only if the system is fitted with an image acquisition, storage and
processing device.
The Apollo EZ table has been designed and built to be connected to the digital system
DIVA HDE.
The display shows the initials DIG.
The collimator can only be selected in the automatic mode or automatic+hold.
It is possible to carry out investigations in fluoro and in exposure by operating the pedal
commands (standard) or button controls (optional).
The Spot Film Device, if fitted, does not perform the cassette and grid vibration movement in
this phase, while the shutters follow possible reductions carried out by the width axle of the
collimator.

Rev. 2
14.4.1 "Digital radiography" block diagram
• Digital ON
→ • No cass or cass in park ←
Reset
↓ joystick
activation
I step:
↓
→ 062 →
within 3 secs.
YES ↓
↓ ↑
YES ↓
Exposure in progress
DSI Exposure frequency ←
↓
YES • I and II step release ↑
← in any condition
NO ↓

Rev. 2
14.5 Digital Tomography

The availability of this mode depends on the presence of a digital image acquisition system (see
digital mode).
The digital tomographic mode makes it possible to carry out tests with the same options of the
standard tomographic mode.
The difference consists in the image receiver that will instead be the I.I. of the film.

Rev. 2
14.5.1 "Digital tomography" block diagram
• Digital ON
→ • Tomo ON (ang+speed) ←
Centering
↓ joystick
activation
I step:
Reset
joystick
activation
↓
062 →
within 3 secs.
YES ↓
• Movement column start
↓ ↑
↓
YES ↓ ↑
the end of Tomo (X-ray → 069 →
request OFF)
NO ↓
• I and II step release
YES with column centering
← ended
NO ↓

Rev. 2
14.5.2 "Sequential digital tomography" block diagram
• Digital ON
→ • Tomo ON (ang+speed) ←
Centering
↓ joystick
activation
↑
I step:
Reset
joystick
activation
↓
→ 062 →
within 3 secs.
YES ↓
→
• Column movement start
↓ ↑
↓
↑ ↑ • "X-ray presence" input NO Alarm
YES ↓ ↑
the end of Tomo (X-ray → 069 →
request OFF)
NO ↓
NO • Start for next tomography
← X-ray control release
YES ↓
← with column centering
ended
↑ NO ↓

Rev. 2
14.6 Angiographic
Also this mode is only possible if the system is fitted with a digital acquisition system.
The step angiographic mode makes it possible to carry out tests of the peripheral artery
circulation limiting the quantity of contrast liquid administered to the patient.
The mode provides for the movement of the Spot Film Device-I.I.-tube group with "steps"
established by the size of the selected I.I. field.
When the Spot Film Device-I.I.-tube group completes the movement, the prep.- II step-
exposure make it possible to take digital images.

Rev. 2
14.6.1 "Stepping angio" block diagram
• Angiografic mode select.

• Digital ON ←
• Scan positioning
• Station choice
↓ ↑
Reset joystick
I station: activation
I step: alarms
• "Digital prep. request" out ↑
ON
Progr. aborted
YES ↓
II step at the generator
gener ator NO Alarm
→ 062 →
within 3 secs.
YES ↓
↓
• "X-ray presence" input NO Alarm
ON within 5 secs. 064 →
YES ↓ ↑
• Exposure release and
prep. per exposure
interruption
↓
I step: (within 15 sec)
• "Digital prep. request" NO Alarm
out ON → 078 →
• Scan movement start
per step
YES ↓
Next station
NO
←
• Scan position reached
• Last station
YES ↓
Program
end

Rev. 2
14.7 Stitching
Stitching function is only available if the system is fitted with wi-fi flat panel digital acquisition
system.
Stitching acquisition is done, after initial positioning, by acquiring 2, 3 or 4 contiguous RAD
images with automatic positioning. The acquisition step will be 35cm or 43cm, depending upon
the VDX detector adopted.
After each image is acquired, Apollo EZ table will move automatically to the next station;
PREP+RAD commands must be kept active during the whole procedure.

Rev. 2
14.7.1 "Stitching
"St itching"
itching " block diagram
• VDX mode select

• Stitching option available
• Digital workstation set-up
• Wi-fi panel into SFD
• Scan direction selected
• Number of station
selected
• Initial positioning with
function (F) joystick.
↓
↓ ←
• PREP+RAD activated ↑
Alarms reset
I station: joystick activation
I step:
Progr. aborted
YES ↓
→ II step at the generator
generator NO Alarm
• Input "generat. Ready
→ 062 →
within 3 secs.
YES ↓
↓
• Input "X-rays present" NO Alarm
ON within 5 sec. → 064 →
YES ↓ ↑
↑
NO Alarm
• PREP+RAD active
→ 078 →
YES ↓
YES End of
• Last station program
→
NO ↓
• Move to next station
after programmed delay
←
• Scan position reached

Service Manual – Emergency end run
Rev. 2
15 EMERGENCY END RUN

All the table movements are stopped by the software at the limits established by the
potentiometers and stored in the EEprom.
All the table movements are fitted with hardware emergency end runs, in case the software
fails to stop for a malfunction, the emergency microswitch immediately after the end of the run
software is engaged.
The emergency microswitches are connected in series and, if the circuit opens, and power is cut
to the power supply remote switch K1L.
All the power circuits are broken ensuring the total safety of the patient, of the operator and
the table if there is a malfunction.
The opening of the remote switch K1L also determines the opening of the "power circuit OK"
input (X15 pin 10) that generates diagnosis 080.
The part that has engaged the emergency switch must be identified identifying the following
table:
Switch
Swi tch Part Side
S44 SID Low
S45 SID High
S46 Transversal tabletop Inner / Outer
S48 Longitudinal tabletop Head / Feet
S50 Angulation Head
S51 Angulation Feet
S52 Scan Feet
S53 Scan Head
S54 Tilting Minimum / Maximum
After turning off the plant, the reason for this situation being created must be identified.
Once the cause has been removed, do the following to restore operation:
1. Press reset button S1 in the electrical cabinet.
2. Turn on the equipment keeping the button pressed down. Wait till the end of the
initialisation cycle.
3. Use the joystick that, in emergency situations, is in the direction opposite that of
the emergency.
4. Release button S1.
Warning
If button S1 is pressed, the series of emergency microswitches is overridden, so if the
cause of the failure is not removed, there will be the danger that the movement
follows its run without any electrical protection.

Service Manual – Three-phase inverter
Rev. 2

Service Manual – Hardware adjustment
Rev. 2
16 HARDWARE
HARDW ARE ADJUSTMENT
16.1 SID speed setting (only for versions with

SID 1100 ÷ 1800 mm / 43.3" ÷ 59")
The SID movement motor installed on this table version can accept a wide voltage range.
Therefore both the 28V socket and the 35V socket of the auxiliary at 250 VA of the T4
transformer can be used (see chapter 25 – Functional drawing – page 1, ref. B8).
The setting described above, increases the motor speed to reduce the positioning time of the
SID if the maximum range available is implemented; this will result in a slight increase in motor
noise.
The average nominal speeds and times to cover the entire travel of 700 mm / 27.6" are:
Socket T4 Time
Tim e Speed
(VAC) (sec) (mm/sec)
28 22 32
35 17 41

Service Manual – Hardware adjustment
Rev. 2

Rev. 2
17 THREE-
THREE - PHASE INVERTER
The inverters in the Apollo EZ table's electrical cabinet are used to control the 4 three-phase
motors responsible for the movements of: tilting, angulation, scan and longitudinal tabletop
(optional).
It is not possible to move at the same time tilting and angulation motors.
These two motors are driven by the same inverter and selected by two contactors.
The model of the inverters are:

MITSHUBISHI model FR-
FR - D740-
D740 - 050-
050 - EC
for tilting, angulation and scan movements and
MITSHUBISHI model FR-
FR - D740-
D740 - 022-
022 - EC
for longitudinal tabletop (optional) movement.

Rev. 2
17.1 Inverter input/output functions

The connection of the inverter, in the specific application for the Apollo EZ equipment, requires
the use of the points listed below.
Number of the
Function
terminal
L1-
L1 - L2-
L2 - L3 Input of three phase 400 V 50/60 Hz power supply.
Output of 380 V motor power supply with variable frequency between 0
and 120 Hz.
U-V-W In the case of inverted motor rotation these outputs must be reversed.
The inversion of the wires to terminals L1-L2-L3 does not change the
rotation.
This the pole of the open commentator for the RUN signal.
SE
This terminal is polarised at 0 V fixed.
This the common (reference 0 V) for the STR and STF signals.
SD
This terminal is polarised at fixed 0 V.
Input of speed reference from 0 to +10 V dc.
This input's usage dial is determined by parameter Pr73 (Pr73=1 range
0V +10V with motor stop at 0 V).
2 The speed of the motor will be proportional to the input signal in this
terminal.
This speed will be proportional to the maximum speed set in parameter
Pr38.
It is the reference 0 V for the V ref. signal (terminal 2).
5
This terminal is polarised at fixed 0 V.
This the output signal from the inverter (active at 0 V) present when the
inverter is in movement (acceleration and deceleration ramps included).
This output is used to enable the processor to recognise the end of the
RUN ramp.
Only when the inverter has finished the ramp will it be possible to
exchange the connection to the motor by means of the remote power
switch.
When this input is polarised at 0 V the inverter pilots the motor in the
STF
"FORWARD" direction.
When this input is polarised at 0 V the inverter pilots the motor in the
STR
"BACK" direction.
This pair of terminals depends on a relay contact inside the inverter. This
contact is closed when the inverter is under normal functioning
A-C conditions. In the case of failure the contact is open. The contacts of the
2 inverters are connected in series and depend on an input of input
board A2.

Rev. 2
17.2 Inverter hardware setting

The inverter FR-
FR - D740 is designed to accept inputs and pilot outputs in PNP logic (high active)
or NPN (low active).
The selection of this functioning is by means of the SINK / SOURCE "jumper" on the front of
the inverter below the cover.
Since Apollo EZ has been designed in NPN logic, the "jumper" will have to be in the position
SINK.
17.3 Inverter software

softwar e parameters setting
To permit the use of the FR-
FR - D740 inverter in the most various applications, a large number of
parameters that can be set are present in the memory.
Some of these are not active in the specific application on Apollo EZ, so even if modified they
will not change the functioning of the equipment, others are used but the data stored is the
default settings inside the inverter program.
In conclusion, some parameters are modified with respect to the default value by Villa Sistemi
Medicali to adapt the functioning for use by Apollo EZ.
For a complete and detailed knowledge of the functioning of the inverter, it is however possible
to consult the dedicated manual, supplied together with the equipment.

Rev. 2
17.3.1 Parameters with data modified by Villa Sistemi Medicali
The description of the function of all this data is reported briefly. Consult the inverter manual
provided together with the machine for more thorough information.
Inverter Data
Param. Function
A5 A6 A18 (*)
P. 0 20 20 20 Boost at the start (1st parameters set).
P. 3 50 50 50 Base frequency
P. 4 50 50 50 Multi-speed setting (hight speed) - RH
P. 5 30 30 30 Multi-speed setting (middle speed) - RH
P. 6 10 10 10 Multi-speed setting (low speed) - RL
P. 7 0 0 0 Acceleration ramp (1st parameter set).
P. 8 0 0 0 Deceleration ramp (1st parameter set).
Activation of the functioning block for excessive current
P. 9 0 0 0 to the motor. The message OL is shown on the display
without a stop in operations.
P. 19 400 400 400 Rated motor voltage.
P. 20 100 100 100 Reference frequency for acceleration / deceleration.
P. 30 0 1 0 Regenerative function selection.
P. 70 0 10 0 Special regenerative brake duty.
P. 71 23 23 3 Applied motor.
P. 72 13 13 13 PWM frequency selection.
P. 73 0 0 0 Analog input selection.
P. 77 2 2 2 Parameter write selection.
P. 79 2 2 2 Operation mode selection.
P. 80 1.1 1.1 0.4 Motor nominal power.
P. 90 7.324 7.424
7.424 37.908 Motor constant (R1).
P. 96 13 13 13 Auto tuning setting / status.
P.122 9999 0 9999 PU communiation check time interval.
P.125 90 90 120 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency.
P.160 0 0 0 Extended function display selection.
P.180 3 3 3 RL terminal function selection.
P.192 11 11 11 ABC terminal function selection.
P.298 162 155 695 Frequency search gain.
P.503 0 0 0 Maintenance timer.
P.872 1 1 0 Input phase loss protection selection.
P.125
90 90 120 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency.
(903)
(9 03)
(*) Inverter A18 is present only with 4 way tabletop version.

Rev. 2
17.3.2 Parameters that maintain the default settings
Listed here below are the most important parameters that, if modified, could jeopardise the
proper functioning of the equipment.
Nevertheless, this list is given to permit, in case of doubt or malfunctioning, to check the
parameter values are correct.
The description of the function of all this data is reported briefly. Consult the inverter manual
provided together with the machine for more thorough information.
Inverter Data
Param. Function
A5 A6 A18 (*)
P. 1 120 120 120 Maximum frequency.
P. 2 0 0 0 Minimum frequency.
P. 10 3 3 3 DC injection brake operation frequency.
P. 11 0.5 0.5 0.5 DC injection brake operation time.
P. 12 6 4 6 DC injection brake operation voltage.
P. 13 0.5 0.5 0.5 Start frequency.
P. 14 0 0 0 Load pattern selection.
P. 17 0 0 0 MRS input selection.
P. 18 120 120 120 High speed maximum frequency.
P. 37 0 0 0 Speed display 0/0.
P. 41 10 10 10 Up-to-frequency sensitivity.
P. 42 6 6 6 Output frequency detection.
P. 43 9999 9999 9999 Output frequency detection for reverse rotation.
P. 44 5 5 5 Second acceleration/deceleration time.
P. 45 9999 9999 9999
99 99 Second deceleration time.
P. 46 9999 9999 9999 Second torque boots.
P. 47 9999 9999 9999 Second V/F (base frequency).
P. 52 0 0 0 DU/PU main display data selection.
P. 55 50 50 50 Frequency monitoring reference.
P. 56 5.00 5.00 2.20 Current monitoring reference.
P. 60 0 0 0 Energy saving control selection.
P. 65 0 0 0 Retry selection.
P. 66 50 50 50 Stall prevention operation reduction starting frequency.
P. 67 0 0 0 Number of retries at fault occurrence.
P. 68 1 1 1 Retry waiting time.
P. 69 0 0 0 Retry count display erese.
Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop
P. 75 14 14 14
selection.
P. 78 0 0 0 Reverse rotation prevention selection.
P.128 0 0 0 PID action selection.
P.150 150 150 150 Output current detection level.
P.151 0 0 0 Output current detection signal delay time.
P.152 5 5 5 Zero current detection level.
P.153 0.5 0.5 0.5 Zero current detection time.

Rev. 2
Inverter Data
Param. Function
A5 A6 A18 (*)
P.158 1 1 1 AM terminal function selection.
P.171 9999 9999 9999 Operation hour meter clear.
P.181 1 1 1 RM terminal function selection.
P.182 2 2 2 RH terminal function selection.
P.240 1 1 1 Soft-PWM operation selection.
(*) Inverter A18 is present only with 4 way tabletop version.

Rev. 2
17.4 Access to parameters for writing

writing
If it is necessary to check the values input into the parameters or modify them, carry out the
operations listed below to access the memory of the inverter.
1. With the inverter in standby, press the MODE key; the display will show the writing P. 0.
0
2. Rotating the wheel, select the parameter position (P.XXX
P.XXX)
P.XXX you need to modify.
3. Press SET key to enter in parameter setting. It will be displayed the actual value.
4. Rotating the wheel, select the new parameter value.
5. Press SET key. The display will show the parameter position and the new selected value
in sequence.
6. Press SET key to store the new value in memory and reach the next parameter position.
7. Repeat the modification procedure or press the MODE key two times to exit the routine.

Rev. 2
17.5 Procedure for restoring the default parameters
Warning
This procedure must only be activated if a malfunction has occurred in the inverter
that has compromised all the settings.
When this procedure is carried out, the default values in the various parameters will
be stored to memory.
So, before activating the functions of the equipment again the data in the table
"Parameters
Parameters with data modified by the Manufacturer"
Manufacturer must be reset and the
data stored in the "Parameters
Parameters that maintain the default settings"
settings table must
be checked.
Carry out the procedure described here below paying the greatest attention.
1. Following the indications in the "Access to the parameters for writing " paragraph
select the parameter P. 77 and change the data stored with the value 0 .
2. Select the parameter ALLC. and change the data stored with the value 1.
3. The Inveter will restore the default data making a new initialization.
Warning
The inverter is now in PU mode that means enabling movements also from the
keyboard. It is therefore essential to pay the greatest attention to the use of the
keys until the data stored in parameter P. 79 is restored at value 2.
4. It is now necessary to riconfigure the inverter parameters using the values present in
table at paragraph 17.3.1, modifying first the values of P. 77 to make access possible to all
the other parameters.

Service Manual – Function of the outputs board leds
Rev. 2
18 FUNCTION OF THE OUTPUTS

OUTP UTS BOARD LEDS
On the A3 Output board (Figure 18-1) there are groups of leds that indicate the condition of the
active output.
Figure 18-1

Rev. 2
The correspondence between the various functions and the leds are listed below.
• H1 LED GROUP
LED 1 (Out 0) K7M (angulation) contactor call
LED 2 (Out 1)
1 spare
LED 3 (Out 2) R-L monitor image scan reverse
LED 4 (Out 3) HIGH-LOW monitor image scan reverse
LED 5 (Out 4) minimum I.I. field selection
LED 6 (Out 5) medium I.I. field selection
LED 7 (Out 6) maximum I.I. field selection
LED 8 (Out 7) activation of K2 ready relay controlled by the main processor
• H2 LED GROUP
LED 9 (Out 8) spare
LED 10 (Out 9) spare
LED 11 (Out 10) SID up
LED 12 (Out 11) SID down
LED 13 (Out 12) tilting motor brake release
LED 15 (Out 14) angulation motor brake release
LED 16 (Out 15) scan motor brake release
• H3 LED GROUP
LED 17 (Out 16) K6M (tilting) contactor call
LED 18 (Out 17) K8M (longitudinale tabletop) contactor call
LED 19 (Out 18) tabletop inside
LED 20 (Out 19) tabletop outside
LED 21 (Out 20) compressor up
LED 22 (Out 21) compressor down
LED 23 (Out 22) collimator lamp on
• H5 LED GROUP
LED 33 (Out 32) angulation-tilting inverter forward
LED 34 (Out 33) angulation-tilting inverter back
LED 35 (Out 34) scan inverter forward
LED 36 (Out 35) scan inverter back
LED 39 (Out 38) tomo 2nd speed
LED 40 (Out 39) tomo 3rd speed

Rev. 2
• H6 LED GROUP
LED 41 (Out
(Out 40) fluoro request
LED 42 (Out 41) X-ray request
LED 43 (Out 42) preparation request
LED 44 (Out 43) digital preparation request
LED 45 (Out 44) second step preparation request
LED 46 (Out 45) tomo 1st speed
LED 47 (Out 46) tomo 4th speed
LED 48 (Out 47)
47 ) tomo 7° speed
• H7 LED GROUP
LED 49 (Out 48) tomo 20°
LED 52 (Out 51) X-ray presence without request
LED 53 (Out 52) Kv automatic-manual fluoro
LED 54 (Out 53) longitudinal tabletop inverter forward
LED 55
5 5 (Out 54) longitudinal tabletop inverter back
LED 56 (Out 55) angio step start
• H8 LED GROUP
LED 57 (Out 56) motion detection
LED 58 (Out 57) CCD x0
LED 61 (Out 60) grid 1 in field
LED 62 (Out 61) grid 1 in park
LED 63 (Out 62) cassette gripper opening
LED 64 (Out 63) cassette gripping
• H9 FUNCTION LEDS
LED 65 (Out 64) R cassette motor forward direction
LED 66 (Out 65) L cassette motor forward direction
LED 67 (Out 66) shutter motor forward direction / grid 2 in field
LED 68 (Out 67) cross subdivision motor forward direction
LED 69 (Out 68) R cassette motor disabled
LED 70 (Out 69) L cassette motor disabled
LED 71 (Out 70) shutter / grid 2 motor disabled
LED 72 (Out 71) cross subdivision motor disabled

Rev. 2

Service Manual – Checking the radiographic exposure results
Rev. 2
19 CHECKING THE RADIOGRAPHIC

RADIOGR APHIC EXPOSURE
RESULTS
19.1 Spot Film Device adjustment

adju stment
The Spot Film Device is adjusted and checked when the equipment is made, however once the
installation of the system has been completed, a further adjustment might be necessary after
carrying out the test radiographs.
To verify the correct position of the cassette, both longitudinal and transversal, and the
shutters it will be necessary to exclude the automatic function of the collimator that could
interfere in limiting the size.
To open the collimator axes automatically to the maximum size the value 1 must be introduced
in cell 262.
When this function is active, the message " Service function active" appears on the touch
screen.

Rev. 2
19.1.1 Checking the longitudinal positioning of the cassette
The cassette positioning with regard to the X-ray main beam, during the exposure program,
must be correct.
An effective method for this verification is provided by the following procedure:

1. Insert a 40x20 (17"x7") cassette and select the subdivision for 4 in line.
2. Run the program and develop the film.
3. The 3 white radiogram separation lines must be the same width. For this verification the
dimension of the separation line determined by the shutters is not important, but the
constancy of this dimension.
4. Carry out the same test with a 35x35 (14"x14") cassette divided into 3.
If the separation lines are different, it means that the positioning of the cassette is wrong in all
its exposures.
To adjust the positioning properly it is possible to change the gains of the PDI function in the
cell of group 300.
The modification of these parameters can give rise to different effects, so an intervention
should only be made if the functioning of PDI method is well understood.
The correction can be carried out by working on these data because the position error is
determined by the difference that the error assumes in function of the length of the run.
Another possibility is that of changing the data in cell 219 which modifies all the runs of all the
subdivisions of the same quantity.
As a further possibility the single runs can be changed through the data set in the cells of
group 400.

Rev. 2
19.1.2 Checking the transversal positioning of the cassette
By carrying out a series of radiograms with a cross layout on a 18x24 (8"x10") or 30x24
(12"x10") film, a continuous line of separation between the upper and lower radiograms of
approx. 2 mm (0.08") thick should be obtained.
If this does not happen it means that the transversal movement of the cassette is wrong.
Having determined whether the defect is caused by an asymmetrical movement with respect
to the centre or by too great or too small a movement for both sides, change the value set in
cells 459 and 460.
19.1.3 Checking the positioning of the shutters
Warning
During these tests do not carry out limitations of the width collimator by means of
the joystick because the shutters follow the collimator.
Carry out the exposure on films of various formats and various subdivisions.
All the separator lines, in the various dimensions and subdivisions must be the same width.
If this not the case, change the data stored in the cells of group 400, in such a way as to
obtain what is required.
It must be remembered that the correction in mm made in the cells has the effect of
increasing and decreasing the final amount, equal to the value of the correction.
As an example a two line subdivision with cassette width of 30 cm (12") results in a minimum
separation line (0.5 mm).
Since the desired value is 2 mm, the quantity of 1.5 mm is added to the value in cell 549 (the
absolute value of which is not important as it depends on the characteristics of the system).

Rev. 2
19.2 X - ray Tube-

Tube - Collimator alignment and X-
X -ray beam
perpendicularity adjustment
Note
Before starting the alignment of the X-ray beam it is necessary to ensure the
column is properly vertical and the hood is properly horizontal; these checks can be
carried out mechanically through the use of a level.
1. Set the SID to minimum.

2. Place a tool consisting of two concentric rings positioned at a distance of a few cm over
the tabletop surface. If the dedicated dummy is not available, a replacement tool can be
made using two elements of different diameters (see Figure 19-1).
3. Close the collimator to get an image size similar to the size of the tool (a way that both
the circles of the tool are completely represented in the image).
4. Select fluoro and check the concentricity of the two rings.
5. If the concentricity is correct (Figure 19-1), go to point 8; otherwise continue.
Tube focus
Collimator centre
Move the collimator in

this direction
min 200 mm
Correct centering
Figure 19-1

Rev. 2
6. Move the collimator with respect to the hood using the adjustment possible in the
coupling cone: the collimator must move in the same direction as the circle furthest from
the tabletop should be moved to become concentric with the circle resting on the tabletop.
7. Move the tool in the same direction to reposition it in the centre of the X-ray field (in such
a way that both circles of the tool are completely represented in the image).
Repeat points 6 and 7, by trial and error, until the two circles are centred.
8. Move the SID to maximum and check that centering is maintained; if this not the case,
check the perpendicularity and repeat the procedure from point 4.
9. Once the concentricity has been achieved at both SID, the verticality of the alignment
between the focus of the hood and the centre of the collimator is guaranteed.

Rev. 2
19.3 Touch Screen collimator size adjustment

The collimator is adjusted and checked in factory.
If for any reason it results that collimator size needs to be slightly adjusted, proceed as follows:
1. Enter collimator service menu.
Collimator Service Menu can be accessed by keeping pressed for at least 2 seconds the
keys "Light” and "Filter", when the collimator is ON. The following screen will be displayed
on the collimator:
A B C 1 2 3 DELETE
D E F 4 5 6
CLEAR
7 8 9
HOME
0 . ENTER
2. Type password “20853” and press “ENTER”; the following will be displayed:
Wait command ....
Insert command bytes Exit

Rev. 2
3. Press “Insert command bytes” key.
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
R W
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
A B C 1 2 3 DELETE
D E F 4 5 6
CLEAR
7 8 9
HOME
0 . ENTER
4. Press “W” key to enable parameters adjust.

5. Type command code “1B”, which corresponds to collimator cross shutter, followed by an
HEX number included between 00 and 64 and then confirm with “Enter”. This number
corresponds to percentual compensation factor and will enlarge the aperture of the cross
shutters. To reduce the aperture, after “1B” type an HEX number between FF and 9C and
then confirm with “Enter”. This number corresponds to percentual compensation factor
and will reduce the aperture of the cross shutters. Type command code “6401” and then
confirm with “Enter” in order to store this change. Max compensation will be ±10% of
aperture.
6. Type command code “1C”, which corresponds to collimator longitudinal shutter, followed by
an HEX number included between 00 and 64 and then confirm with “Enter”. This number
corresponds to percentual compensation factor and will enlarge the aperture of the
longitudinal shutters. To reduce the aperture, after “1B” type an HEX number between FF
and 9C and then confirm with “Enter”. This number corresponds to percentual
compensation factor and will reduce the aperture of the longitudinal shutters. Type
command code “6401” and then confirm with “Enter” in order to store this change. Max
compensation will be ±10% of aperture.
7. Test collimator aperture and if needed repeat steps 9 and 10 to define proper correction.

Rev. 2

Service Manual – Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Rev. 2
20 DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING

TROU BLESHOOTING
Any failures that might occur during the use of the Apollo EZ table are, in the majority of
cases, indicated by means of a diagnosis that is shown on the display.
In some cases however, failures can occur that do not affect the electronic logic of the
processor.
This chapter is therefore divided into two parts: the first describes the faults deriving from
displayed alarms and the way they can be solved, the second describes faults of different
types.

Rev. 2

Service Manual - Diagnostic and troubleshooting
Rev. 2
20.1 Troubleshooting for displayed diagnoses
Note
The resettable alarms are highlighted with (*).
(*)
Error Diagnosis Cause of the alarm Corrective measures

59 X-Ray ON from generator X-rays from the generator The signal must be at high level when the generator does not emit rays. Check
without fluoro or exposure have been detected (input between X13-2 (Input board) and ground with a multimeter. If the level is low (0 V)
request X0-13 active) without any even in conditions of non-emission, remove the wire coming from the generator and
fluoro or exposure request, or connected to X0-13 and carry out the measurement again. If the defect persists, the
the presence of X-rays has fault might be in the pull-up circuit of the Input board or on the port of input
remained active for longer 74HC245 (integrated D21) of the CPU board.
than 700ms from the
interruption of the fluoro or
exposure request

Service Manual – Diagnostic and troubleshooting
Rev. 2

60 (*) Shutters positioning time-out In the Spot Film Device mode, When the preparation or the ejection of the cassette is activated, the shutters should
in the standard mode the shutters have not be placed on the cassette format or division, or on the I.I. format. Insert a cassette
reached the set point position 35x43 (14 "x17"), select the full size and press preparation.
within 5 seconds. Check that shutters opening has started when the preparation command is given.
Solutions:
The shutters are controlled like PDI, therefore the non-achievement of the set point
can only be caused by a failure in the drive circuit on the Spot Film Device motors
driver board (A4).
61 (*) Shutters positioning time-out In the rapid sequence mode, The description of alarm 60 applies.
in the rapid sequence (Volet) the shutters have not
mode. reached the set point position
within 5 seconds.
62 (*) Ready from generator not The generator did not activate Check between X13-1 (Input board) and ground with a multimeter. The level must be
present the “ready” signal within low (0 V) when the generator has completed the preparation operations. Remove the
3 secs. from the request of wire coming from the generator connected on X0-12 and make a jumper directly to
X-ray II step. the ground on this terminal. If the defect persists, the fault might be in the pull-up
circuit of the Input board or on the port of input 74HC245 (integrated D21) of the
CPU board.
63 (*) Rapid sequence stopped by The rapid sequence was The fault could be caused by an operator error or by a defect in the preparation or X-
operator interrupted by releasing the ray circuit. Check the preparation and X-ray switches on the pedal command and the
X-ray control. relative circuit depending on connector X41. The preparation request is then sent to
CPU board via serial Can-Bus, so there cannot be hardware defects at this level.

Rev. 2

64 (*) X-ray ON not present from The generator did not activate Check between X13-2 (Input board) and ground with a multimeter. The level must be
generator the "X-ray" signal within low (0 V) when the generator begins the emission. Remove the wire coming from the
5 secs. from the fluoro generator connected on X0-13 and make a direct jumper to ground on this terminal
request. when the table activates the X-ray request. If the defect persists, the fault might be
in the pull-up circuit of the Input board or on the port of input 74HC245 (integrated
D21) of the CPU board.
65 (*) Generator does not stop The generator X-ray time A radiography carried out on the Spot Film Device can last for a maximum of 6.5
exposure lasted longer than 6.5 secs. secs. Check between X13-2 (Input board) and ground with a multimeter. The level
must be low (0 V) when the generator begins the emission but it must turn off after
6.5 sec even if the X-ray request remains active. Remove the wire coming from the
generator connected on X0-13 during the emission. If the defect persists, the fault
might be in the pull-up circuit of the Input board or on the port of input 74HC245
(integrated D21) of the CPU board.
66 (*) Exposure command released Exposure request released The fault might be caused by an operator error or by a defect in the X-ray request
before end of X-ray time before X-ray time (input circuit. Check the X-ray control switch on the pedal control and the relative circuit
X0-13) finished. depending on connector X41. The X-ray request is then sent to the CPU board via
serial Can-Bus, so there can be no hardware defects at this level.
67 (*) Preparation command Preparation request released The fault might be caused by an operator error or by a defect in the preparation
released before end of X-ray before X-ray time (input circuit. Check the preparation switch on the pedal control and the relative circuit
time X0-13) finished. depending on connector X41. The preparation request is then sent to the CPU board
via serial Can-Bus, so there cannot be hardware defects at this level.

Rev. 2

meas ures
68 (*) Generator stopped X-ray The generator interrupted the A tomography has a X-ray time determined by the presence of the column in the
during Tomo. X-ray emission before the Tomo angle. The table will therefore be responsible for turning off the emission.
tomography angle was Check between X13-2 (Input board) and ground with a multimeter. The level must
completed. stay low (0 V) for the entire time column is in the Tomo angle. Make a jumper
between X0-13 and the ground for the tomography time. If the defect persists, the
fault might be in the pull-up circuit of the Input board or on the port of input
74HC245 (integrated D21) of the CPU board.
69 (*) Generator does not stop The generator continued the Check between X13-2 (Input board) and ground with an oscilloscope. The level must
exposure at the end of Tomo X-ray emission for more than go high when the table deactivates the X-ray request. Make sure the generator does
angle 0.7 secs. after the X-ray not present a "queue" of this signal for a time greater than 700 msec. after the X-ray
control was deactivated. request of the table is turned off. If the defect persists, the fault might be in the pull-
up circuit of the Input board or on the port of input 74HC245 (integrated D21) of the
CPU board.
70 Compressor did not reach The compressor did not reach The table logic activates the return of the compressor to park (raised position) when
park position in tomo and the parking position within access to tomographic or angiographic mode is requested. If the compressor reaches
angio mode. 30 secs. from the activation the park position (switch S26, input X15-2 Input board) the fault may be on the driver
of the control for the access circuit of the compressor motor (output X26 pin 9 and 10). You should also verify that
in tomo or angio mode access. the input X15-2, terminating at the park switch, is high when the compressor
activates the switch.
77 (*) Preparation request In angiographic mode the Check between X13-1 (Input board) and ground with a multimeter. The level must be
interrupted by digital DSI generator ready signal is low (0 V) when the exposure procedure in digital mode is activated. Remove the wire
absent. coming from the generator connected on X0-12 and make a direct jumper to ground
on this terminal when the table activates the X-ray request. If the defect persists, the
fault might be in the pull-up circuit of the Input board or on the port of input
74HC245 (integrated D21) of the CPU board.

Rev. 2
Error Diagnosis Cause of the alarm Corrective

Correctiv e measures
78 (*) Program aborted In angio modality, the X-ray The fault could be caused by an operator error or by a defect in the preparation and
sequence was interrupted X-ray circuit. Check the preparation and X-ray switches on the pedal command and
before the set number of the relative circuits depending on connector X41. The preparation request is then sent
steps was completed. to the CPU board via serial Can-Bus, so there cannot be hardware defects at this
level.
80 General emergency The power relay (input The logic recognises that the power circuit of the table is not active if the input
X15-10) was deactivated by X15-10 is not at low level. This since this input is dependent on the secondary contact
external causes. of the power relay K1L. The fault might be caused by a fault in this circuit or by the
break in the series circuit of the movement emergency switches (X0 pin 5 and 6).
82 Anti-crushing circuit damaged The anti-pinching control The table can be configured for the anti-pinching control (cell 254). If the control is
circuit is interrupted. active, the input X14-5 (Input board) must be active (0 V). Check the membrane
circuit series and the Spot Film Device board A10.
83 (*) SFD is disabled The Spot Film Device has This signal is not caused by a fault, but by the request of a Spot Film Device function
been disabled, therefore the if cell 261 is set at 1.
calibration of the parts inside
the Spot Film Device is not
possible.
84 (*) Cross subdivision not present The Spot Film Device is not This signal is not caused by a fault, but by the cross subdivision function request (cell
pre-arranged with the cross 251 = 1) with the Spot Film Device not pre-arranged. Check the setting of the cell.
subdivision.
90 EEPROM data damaged The RAM has detected a Each time the equipment is turned on the data in the Eeprom are compared by the
non-intentional change of the RAM with the previous data through the checksum. If they do not correspond, it
data in the EEprom. means the data in the Eeprom could be damaged. You are recommended to change
the Eeprom that could be defective.

Rev. 2

91 (*) Angulation movement over During the movement, the The angulation movement is a controlled axis with PDI logic. The actual trajectory
max error angulation has accumulated a must therefore follow the theoretical one. A delayed or advanced tolerance of the
position error above the one actual position is allowed but within a limit set in cell 311. Exceeding this tolerance
set in the cell 311. may be caused by a fault of the drive inverter A5 of the axis or a partial or total
seizure of the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the solution
to the problem. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be removed.
92 (*) Scanning movement over max During the movement, the The scan movement is a controlled axis with PDI logic. The actual trajectory must
error scan has accumulated a therefore follow the theoretical one. An advance or delay tolerance of the real position
position error above the one is admitted but within a limit set in the cell 329. Exceeding this tolerance might be
set in cell 329. caused by a fault in the axle control inverter A6 or by a partial or total seizing up of
the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the solution to the
problem. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be removed.
93 (*) The tilting movement has During the tilting movement, The tilting movement is a controlled axis with PDI logic. The actual trajectory must
exceeded the maximum error. a position error has therefore follow the theoretical one. A delayed or advanced tolerance of the actual
accumulated above the one position is allowed but within a limit set in cell 346. Exceeding this tolerance may be
set in cell 346. caused by a fault of the drive inverter A5 of the axis or a partial or total seizure of
the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the solution to the
94 (*) The longitudinal tabletop During the movement, the The longitudinal tabletop movement is a controlled axis with PDI logic. The actual
movement has exceeded the longitudinal tabletop has trajectory must therefore follow the theoretical one. A delayed or advanced tolerance
maximum error. gained an error position of the actual position is allowed but within a limit set in cell 346. Exceeding this
greater to that set in cell 361. tolerance may be caused by a fault of the drive inverter A18 of the axis or a partial or
total seizure of the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the
solution to the problem. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be removed.

Rev. 2
Error Diagnosis Cause

Caus e of the alarm Corrective measures
95 (*) Shutters movement over max During the movement, the The shutter movement is a controlled axis with PDI logic. The actual trajectory must
error shutters have accumulated a therefore follow the theoretical one. A delayed or advanced tolerance of the actual
position error above the one position is allowed but within a limit set in cell 363. Exceeding this tolerance may be
set in cell 363. caused by a fault of the drive hardware circuit of the axis or a partial or total seizure
of the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the solution to the
96 (*) Right cassette belt movement During the movement, the The cassette RH belt movement is a controlled axis with PDI logic. The actual
over max error right belt has accumulated a trajectory must therefore follow the theoretical one. A delayed or advanced tolerance
position error above the one of the actual position is allowed but within a limit set in cell 375. Exceeding this
set in cell 375. tolerance may be caused by a fault of the drive hardware circuit of the axis or a
partial or total seizure of the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell is
not the solution to the problem. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be
removed.
97 (*) Left cassette belt movement During the movement, the The cassette LH belt movement is a controlled axis with PDI logic. The actual
over max error left belt has accumulated a trajectory must therefore follow the theoretical one. A delayed or advanced tolerance
position error above the one of the actual position is allowed but within a limit set in cell 375. Exceeding this
set in cell 375. tolerance may be caused by a fault of the drive hardware circuit of the axis or a
partial or total seizure of the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in the cell is
not the solution to the problem. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be
removed.
98 (*) Cross subdivision movement During the movement, the The cassette transversal movement for cross subdivision is a controlled axis with PDI
over max error cross subdivision has logic. The actual trajectory must therefore follow the theoretical one. A delayed or
accumulated a position error advanced tolerance of the actual position is allowed but within a limit set in cell 399.
above the one set in cell 399. Exceeding this tolerance may be caused by a fault of the drive hardware circuit of the
axis or a partial or total seizure of the mechanical sliding. Increasing the value set in
the cell is not the solution to the problem. The cause of the mechanical hardening
must be removed.

Rev. 2

99 Inverter fault One or both inverters are in a The input X18-1 (Input board) refers to 0 V when the inverters are in the proper
warning status, therefore working conditions. If there is a fault in one of the 2 inverters, the series circuit
access X18-1 is deactivated. dependent on the above mentioned input is deactivated. The cause of the fault must
be verified and removed or the inverter replaced if the fault cannot be repaired.
101 Angulation potentiometer The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potentiometers are
under min angulation potentiometer is stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the angulation potentiometer is lower
below that stored in Eeprom. than the minimum minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be
caused by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the
break in the potentiometer power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power
supply voltage at the ends of the potentiometer (5 V) and the reference voltage at
the converter input to be measured on the connector X20-4 of the Input board.
102 Angulation potentiometer The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potentiometers are
over max angulation potentiometer is stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the angulation potentiometer is over the
above that stored in Eeprom. maximum plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by
the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
potentiometer power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage
at the ends of the potentiometer (5 V) and the reference voltage at the converter
input to be measured on the connector X20-4 of the Input board.
103 Scan potentiometer under min The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potentiometers are
scan potentiometer is below stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the scan potentiometer is lower than the
that stored in Eeprom. minimum minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused
by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in
the potentiometer power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply
voltage at the ends of the potentiometer (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input
of the converter to be measured on connector X20-5 of the Input board.

Rev. 2

Corre ctive measures
104 Scan potentiometer over max The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potentiometers are
scan potentiometer is above stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the scan potentiometer is over the
that stored in Eeprom. maximum plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by
at the ends of the potentiometer (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the
converter to be measured on connector X20-5 of the Input board.
105 Tilting potentiometer below The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potentiometers are
the minimum tilting potentiometer is below stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the tilting potentiometer is lower than
that stored in Eeprom. the minimum minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be
the input of the converter to be measured on connector X20-2 of the Input board.
106 Tilting potentiometer above The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potentiometers are
the maximum. tilting potentiometer is above stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the tilting potentiometer is over

Rev. 2

107 Longitudinal tabletop The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potentiometers are
potentiometer is below the longitudinal tabletopstored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the potentiometer of the longitudinal
minimum. potentiometer is below that tabletop is lower than the minimum minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is
stored in Eeprom. generated. This can be caused by the movement that, because of a fault, has
exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potentiometer power supply circuit. Check
the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potentiometer (5 V) and
the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector
X20-3 of the Input board.
108 Longitudinal tabletop The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potentiometers are
potentiometer above the longitudinal tabletop stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the potentiometer of the longitudinal
maximum. potentiometer is above that tabletop is over maximum plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This
stored in Eeprom. can be caused by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by
the break in the potentiometer power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power
109 WB width cassette The WB width cassette The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potentiometers are
potentiometer below the potentiometer value is less stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the potentiometer of the WB cassette
minimum than that stored in EEPROM. width is lower than the minimum minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is
generated. This can be caused by the breakage of the circuit of the power supply
potentiometer. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the
potentiometer (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be
measured on connector X20-8 of the Input board.

Rev. 2

110 WB width cassette The WB width cassette The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potentiometers are
potentiometer above the potentiometer value is greater stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the potentiometer of the WB cassette
maximum than that stored in EEPROM. width is lower than the minimum minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is
111 Transversal tabletop The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potentiometers are
potentiometer under min tabletop potentiometer is stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the potentiometer of the tabletop is
below that stored in Eeprom. lower than the minimum minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This
can be caused by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by
112 Transversal tabletop The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potentiometers are
potentiometer over max tabletop potentiometer is stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the potentiometer of the tabletop is over

Rev. 2

113 SID potentiometer under min The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potentiometers are
SID potentiometer is below stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the potentiometer of the SID is lower
that stored in Eeprom. than the minimum less the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be
114 SID potentiometer over max The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potentiometers are
SID potentiometer is above stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the potentiometer of the SID is over
115 WB height cassette The WB cassette height The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potentiometers are
potentiometer below the potentiometer value is less stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the potentiometer of the WB cassette
minimum than that stored in EEPROM. height is lower than the minimum minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is

Rev. 2

116 WB height cassette The WB height cassette The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potentiometers are
potentiometer above the potentiometer value is greater stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the potentiometer of the WB cassette
maximum than that stored in EEPROM. height is lower than the minimum minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is
123 Compression force The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potentiometers are
potentiometer under min. compressor potentiometer is stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the compression force potentiometer is
below that stored in Eeprom. lower than the minimum minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This
can be caused by the breakage of the circuit of the power supply potentiometer.
Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potentiometer
(5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on
connector X20-1 of the Input board.
124 Compression force The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potentiometers are
potentiometer over max. compressor potentiometer is stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the compression force potentiometer is
above that stored in Eeprom. over maximum plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be

Rev. 2

125 Grid 1 potentiometer under The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potentiometers are
min grid 1 potentiometer is below stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the potentiometer grid 1 is lower than
that stored in Eeprom. the minimum minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be
126 Grid 1 potentiometer over The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potentiometers are
max grid 1 potentiometer is above stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the grid potentiometer is over maximum
that stored in Eeprom. plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the
movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
127 Gripping potentiometer under The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potentiometers are
min gripping potentiometer is stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the gripping potentiometer is lower than
below that stored in EEprom. the minimum minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be

Rev. 2

128 Gripping potentiometer over The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potentiometers are
max potentiometer of the gripping stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the gripping movement potentiometer is
is above that stored in over maximum plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be
EEprom. caused by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the
129 Cross subdivision The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potentiometers are
potentiometer under min cross subdivision stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the potentiometer cross subdivision is
potentiometer is below that lower than the minimum minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This
stored in EEprom. can be caused by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by
130 Cross subdivision The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potentiometers are
potentiometer over max cross subdivision stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the potentiometer cross subdivision
potentiometer is above that movement is over maximum plus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated.
stored in EEprom. This can be caused by the movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit
or by the break in the potentiometer power supply circuit. Check the presence of the
power supply voltage at the ends of the potentiometer (5 V) and the reference
voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X19-4 of the Input
board.

Rev. 2

131 Shutters potentiometer under The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potentiometers are
min shutters potentiometer is stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the shutters potentiometer is lower than
below that stored in Eeprom. the minimum minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be
132 Shutters potentiometer over The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potentiometers are
max shutters potentiometer is stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the shutter potentiometer is over
converter to be measured on connector X19-1 of the Input card.
133 (*) The angulation potentiometer An angulation potentiometer This alarm can only cut in in the potentiometers adjustment procedure and occurs
max is lower than min. max under the min was when because of an operating error or fault, for which the potentiometer does not
stored. move or the digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to
the maximum has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the
minimum position.
134 (*) The scan potentiometer max A scan potentiometer max This alarm can only cut in in the potentiometers adjustment procedure and occurs
is lower than min. under the min was stored. when because of an operating error or fault, for which the potentiometer does not
move or the digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to
minimum position.

Rev. 2

135 (*) The tilting potentiometer max A tilting potentiometer max This alarm can only cut in in the potentiometers adjustment procedure and occurs
is lower than min. under the min was stored. when because of an operating error or fault, for which the potentiometer does not
minimum position.
13 6 (*) The longitudinal tabletop
136 A longitudinal tabletop This alarm can only cut in in the potentiometers adjustment procedure and occurs
potentiometer max is lower potentiometer max under the when because of an operating error or fault, for which the potentiometer does not
than min. min was stored. move or the digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to
minimum position.
137 (*) The max of the WB cassette A WB cassette width This alarm can only cut in in the potentiometers adjustment procedure and occurs
width potentiometer is less potentiometer max value when because of an operating error or fault, for which the potentiometer does not
than the min. under the min was stored. move or the digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to
minimum position.
138 (*) The transversal tabletop A tabletop potentiometer max This alarm can only cut in in the potentiometers adjustment procedure and occurs
potentiometer max is lower under the min was stored. when because of an operating error or fault, for which the potentiometer does not
than min move or the digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to
minimum position.
139 (*) The SID potentiometer max is A SID potentiometer max This alarm can only cut in in the potentiometers adjustment procedure and occurs
lower than min. under the min was stored. when because of an operating error or fault, for which the potentiometer does not
minimum position.

Rev. 2

140 (*) The max of the WB cassette A WB cassette height This alarm can only cut in in the potentiometers adjustment procedure and occurs
height potentiometer is less potentiometer max value when because of an operating error or fault, for which the potentiometer does not
than the min. under the min was stored. move or the digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to
minimum position.
144 (*) The max of the compression A compressor potentiometer This alarm can only cut in in the potentiometers adjustment procedure and occurs
force potentiometer is lower max under the min was when because of an operating error or fault, for which the potentiometer does not
than the min. stored. move or the digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to
minimum position.
145 (*) The grid 1 potentiometer max A grid 1 potentiometer max This alarm can only cut in in the potentiometers adjustment procedure and occurs
is lower than min under the min was stored. when because of an operating error or fault, for which the potentiometer does not
minimum position.
146 (*) The gripping potentiometer A gripping potentiometer max This alarm can only cut in in the potentiometers adjustment procedure and occurs
max is lower than min value under the min was when because of an operating error or fault, for which the potentiometer does not
stored. move or the digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to
minimum position.
147 (*) The cross subdivision A cross subdivision This alarm can only cut in in the potentiometers adjustment procedure and occurs
potentiometer max is lower potentiometer max under the when because of an operating error or fault, for which the potentiometer does not
than min min was stored. move or the digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to
minimum position.

Rev. 2

148 (*) The shutter potentiometer A shutter potentiometer max This alarm can only cut in in the potentiometers adjustment procedure and occurs
max is lower than min. under the min was stored. when because of an operating error or fault, for which the potentiometer does not
minimum position.
14 9 (*) The grid 2 potmeter max is
149 A grid 2 potmeter max under This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when
lower than min the min was stored. because of an operating error or fault, for which the potmeter does not move or the
digital analogue converter is broken, the value stored corresponding to the maximum
has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position.
150 Grid 2 potmeter under min The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
grid 2 potmeter is below that the Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter grid 2 is lower than the minimum
stored in Eeprom. minus the value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the
movement that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the
potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the
ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to
be measured on connector X19-1 of the input PCB.
151 Grid 2 potmeter over max The value detected for the The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in
grid 2 potmeter is above that the Eeprom. If the current value of the grid 2 potmeter is over maximum plus the
stored in Eeprom. value set in cell 450, the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement
that, because of a fault, has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power
supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the
potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be
measured on connector X19-1 of the input PCB.

Rev. 2
156 Serial line: timeout from The data does not arrive on The main processor and the supervisor are connected to each other parallel and in
Supervis. to Main µP the serial line from the series. If the serial dialogue is interrupted, this might be caused by a fault in one of
supervisor to the main µP for the 2 processors or by the lack of a 5 V power supply to the main processor (led H1
longer than 0.3 secs. CPU board) or the supervisor (led H2 CPU board). This failure is due to an
interruption on the line:
• supervisor TX
• main X-ray
157 Serial line: timeout from Main The data does not arrive on The main processor and the supervisor are connected to each other parallel and in
µP to supervisor the serial line from the main series. If the serial dialogue is interrupted, this might be caused by a fault in one of
µP to the supervisor for the 2 processors or by the lack of a 5 V power supply to the main processor (led H1
longer than 0.3 secs. CPU board) or the supervisor (led H2 CPU board). This failure is due to an
interruption on the line:
• X-ray supervisor
• TX main.
158 Single Fault open at switch The Single Fault circuit is not The SF circuit is a series obtained from the modules which the commands are on.
on. closed, therefore access Furthermore there are jumpers where optional elements could be connected. Measure
X13-24 is not at 0 V when the continuity of the various modules as follows with the table off:
the table is powered on. • command console: X8-12 with X41-7 (series joystick)
• pedal command: X41-7 with X41-5 (series X-ray commands)
• optional command: X42-7 with X42-5 (closure jumper)
• table-
table - mounted control: X16-23 with X16-24 (series keys)
• general terminal block: X0-25 with X0-24 (closure jumper).

Rev. 2
159 Inputs close at switch on A joystick or double control When the table is powered up, a check is carried out on the level of all the inputs
button are active when the relative to the commands present on the touch screen console and the table-
table is powered up mounted command. If one of these keys or joystick is detected as active, then an
alarm is present. This could be caused by the incorrect activation of a control during
the powering up procedure or by a faulty command regarding the state of the table-
mounted control keys (PCB A8), of the X-ray commands (pedal and any button pad)
and the console joystick (to be checked directly on the buttons on the c.s.).
160 Single fault open SID up=1 / The SID lift control is The main and supervisor process are connected in series and parallel. The supervisor
serial bit 0=0 probably active when the SF receives on the parallel SID on command line (diode V7 CPU board) the activation
is open and the output port is signal, in addition to that of the SF is open. Nevertheless, the serial confirmation of
active, but the supervisor the movement, sent by the main processor is not present. The cause of failure may
does not receive the serial be due to a fault on the serial line by a processor, or a HW fault on the parallel line
confirmation of the control terminating on V7. Keep in mind that to confirm the second hypothesis, a fault on the
activation. SF line that is open must also be present.
161 Single fault open SID up=0 / The supervisor detects the The main and supervisor process are connected in series and parallel. The supervisor
serial bit 0=1 open SF and the serial recognises that the SF is open and it receives confirmation of the SID on movement
confirmation that the SID lift activation on the serial line. On the parallel SID on command line (Diode V7 CPU
control is active, but the board) there is not however an activation signal. The cause of failure may be due to a
output port is not active. fault on the serial line by a processor, or a HW fault on the parallel line terminating on
V7. Keep in mind that to confirm the first hypothesis, a fault on the SF line that is
open must also be present.

Rev. 2
162 Single fault open SID The SID control down is What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case, too.
down =1 / serial bit 1=0 probably active as the SF is The parallel line involved is however the one for the SID down command and the
open and the output port is reference circuit is dependent on diode V8 (CPU board).
active, but the supervisor
does not receive the serial
confirmation of the control
activation.
163 Single fault open SID The supervisor detects the What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case, too.
down =0 / serial bit 1=1. open SF and the serial The parallel line involved is however the one for the SID down command and the
confirmation that the SID reference circuit is dependent on diode V8 (CPU board).
down control is active, but the
output port is not active.
164 Single fault open tabletop The tabletop in control is What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case, too.
in=1 / serial bit 2=0 probably active as the SF is The parallel line involved is however the one for the tabletop in command and the
activation.
165 Single fault open tabletop The supervisor detects the What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case, too.
in=0 / serial bit 2=1. open SF and the serial The parallel line involved is however the one for the tabletop in command and the
confirmation that the tabletop reference circuit is dependent on diode V9 (CPU board).
in control is active, but the

Rev. 2
166 Single fault open tabletop The tabletop out control is What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case, too.
out=1 / serial bit 3=0. probably active as the SF is The parallel line involved is however the one for the tabletop out command and the
activation.
167 Single fault open tabletop The supervisor detects the What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case, too.
out=0 / serial bit 3=1 open SF and the serial The parallel line involved is however the one for the tabletop out command and the
confirmation that the tabletop reference circuit is dependent on diode V10 (CPU board).
out control is active, but the
168 Single fault open compressor The compressor lift control is What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case, too.
up=1 / serial bit 4=0 probably active when the SF The parallel line involved is however the one for the compressor up command and the
is open and the output port is reference circuit is dependent on diode V11 (CPU board).
activation.
169 Single fault open compressor The supervisor detects the What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case, too.
up=0 / serial bit 4=1 open SF and the serial The parallel line involved is however the one for the compressor up command and the
confirmation that the reference circuit is dependent on diode V11 (CPU board).
compressor lift control is
active, but the output port is
not active.

Rev. 2
Error Diagnosis
Diag nosis Cause of the alarm Corrective measures
170 Single fault open compressor The compressor down control What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case, too.
down =1 / serial bit 5=0. is probably active when the The parallel line involved is however the one for the compressor down command and
SF is open and the output the reference circuit is dependent on diode V12 (CPU board).
port is active, but the
supervisor does not receive
the serial confirmation of the
control activation.
171 Single fault open compressor The supervisor detects the What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case, too.
down =0 / serial bit 5=1. open SF and the serial The parallel line involved is however the one for the compressor down command and
confirmation that the the reference circuit is dependent on diode V12 (CPU board).
compressor down control is
not active.
172 Single fault open A5 inverter The A5 inverter enabling What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case, too.
enable=1/serial bit 6=0 control is probably active The parallel line involved is however the one for the inverter A5 (tilting-angulation)
when the SF is open and the movement control and the reference circuit is dependent on diodes V13 (forwards)
output port is active, but the and V14 (back) (CPU board).
control activation.
173 Single fault open A5 inverter The supervisor detects the What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case, too.
enable=0/serial bit 6=1 open SF and the serial The parallel line involved is however the one for the inverter A5 (tilting-angulation)
confirmation that the A5 movement control and the reference circuit is dependent on diodes V13 (forwards)
inverter enabling control is and V14 (back) (CPU board).
not active.

Rev. 2

Ca use of the alarm Corrective measures
enable=1/serial bit 7=0 control is probably active The parallel line involved is however the one for the inverter A6 movement (scan)
when the SF is open and the movement and the reference circuit is dependent on diodes V15 (forwards) and V16
output port is active, but the (backwards) (CPU board).
control activation.
enable=0/serial bit 7=1 open SF and the serial The parallel line involved is however the one for the inverter A6 movement (scan)
confirmation that the A6 movement and the reference circuit is dependent on diodes V15 (forwards) and V16
inverter enabling control is (backwards) (CPU board).
not active.
enable=1/serial bit 8=0 control is probably active The parallel line involved is however the one for the inverter A18 movement
when the SF is open and the (longitudinal tabletop) and the reference circuit is dependent on diodes V27 (forwards)
output port is active, but the and V28 (backwards) (CPU board).
control activation.
enable=0/serial bit 8=1 open SF and the serial The parallel line involved is however the one for the inverter A18 movement
confirmation that the A18 (longitudinal tabletop) and the reference circuit is dependent on diodes V27 (forwards)
inverter enabling control is and V28 (backwards) (CPU board).
not active.

Rev. 2
180 Single fault close / SID up=1 The SF circuit is not active There is HW disagreement regarding the SID up command. The movement activation
(closed) but the SID lift circuit dependent on the diode V7 (Cupboard) is active but the SF series circuit is
control output port is active. closed. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on.
181 Single fault closed / SID The SF circuit is not active There is HW disagreement regarding the SID down command. The movement
down=1 (closed) but the SID down activation circuit dependent on the diode V8 (CPU board) is active but the SF series
control output port is active. circuit is closed. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is
on.
182 Single fault close / tabletop The SF circuit is not active There is HW disagreement regarding the tabletop in command. The movement
in=1. (closed) but the tabletop activation circuit dependent on the diode V9 (CPU board) is active but the SF series
control output port is active. circuit is closed. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is
on.
183 Single fault close / tabletop The SF circuit is not active There is HW disagreement regarding the tabletop out command. The movement
out=1. (closed) but the tabletop out activation circuit dependent on the diode V10 (CPU board) is active but the SF series
control output is active. circuit is closed. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is
on.
184 Single fault close / The SF circuit is not active There is HW disagreement regarding the compressor up command. The movement
compressor up=1 (closed) but the compressor activation circuit dependent on the diode V7 (CPU board) is active but the SF series
lift control output port is circuit is closed. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is
active. on.
185 Single fault closed / The SF circuit is not active There is HW disagreement regarding the compressor down command. The movement
compressor down=1 (closed) but the compressor activation circuit dependent on the diode V12 (CPU board) is active but the SF series
down control output port is circuit is closed. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is
active. on.

Rev. 2
186 Single fault close / A5 The SF circuit is not active There is a HW disagreement regarding the forward or back command of the A5
inverter enable =1. (closed) but the A5 inverter inverter (tilting – angulation). The movement activation circuit dependent on diodes
enabling command output V13 (forwards) and V15 (back) (CPU board) is active but the SF series circuit is closed.
port is active. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on.
inverter enable=1 (closed) but the A6 inverter inverter (scan). The movement activation circuit dependent on diodes V13 (forwards)
enabling command output and V15 (back) (CPU board) is active but the SF series circuit is closed. A check must
port is active. be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on.
inverter enable =1 (closed) but the A18 inverter inverter (longitudinal tabletop). The activation circuit of the movement on diodes V27
enabling command output (forward) and V28 (Back) (CPU) is active but the SF series is closed. A check must be
port is active. made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on.
191 The angulation potentiometer The angulation control is The main processor activates the angulation movement control and at the same time
does not move with active active but potentiometer checks the relative potentiometer is sending feedback signals in proportion to the
control. feedback does not detect the speeds applied. The alarm is generated when motion is detected or the speed is not
motion. aligned to that described in section 11.3.5. This phenomenon is more evident in the
first instants of motion due to mechanical inertia. When the difference between the
applied speed (Sp. ref. at the start up) and the speed detected (potentiometer
feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain time, the alarm is
generated. The time and the value applied in the formula are set in cells 671 and 672.
The cause of the alarm may be:
• mechanical hardening of the movement
• potentiometer slip
• incorrect values of cells 671 and 672.

Rev. 2
192 The scan potentiometer does The scan movement control isThe main processor activates the scan movement command and at the same time
not move with active control. active but the potentiometerchecks the relative potentiometer is sending feedback signals in proportion to the
feedback does not detect thespeeds applied. The alarm is generated when motion is detected or the speed is not
motion. aligned to that described in section 11.3.5. This phenomenon is more evident in the
193 The tilting potentiometer does The tilting movement control The main processor activates the tilting movement control and at the same time
not move with the control is active but the checks the relative potentiometer is sending feedback signals in proportion to the
active. potentiometer feedback does speeds applied. The alarm is generated when motion is detected or the speed is not
not detect the motion. aligned to that described in section 11.3.5. This phenomenon is more evident in the

Rev. 2
194 The longitudinal tabletop The control for theThe main processor activates the longitudinal tabletop movement control and at the
potentiometer does not move longitudinal tabletopsame time checks the relative potentiometer is sending feedback signals in proportion
with the control active. movement is active but the to the speeds applied. The alarm is generated when motion is detected or the speed
movement is not detected is not aligned to that described in section 11.3.5. This phenomenon is more evident in
through the feedback of the the first instants of motion due to mechanical inertia. When the difference between
potentiometer. the applied speed (Sp. ref. at the start up) and the speed detected (potentiometer
195 The shutter potentiometer The shutters movement The main processor activates the shutter movement output and at the same time
does not move with active control is active but the checks the relative potentiometer is sending feedback signals in proportion to the
control. potentiometer feedback does speed applied. The alarm is generated when motion is detected or the speed is not
not detect the motion. aligned to that described in section 11.3.5. This phenomenon is more evident in the

Rev. 2

Correct ive measures
196 Right belt cassette encoder The R cassette movement The main processor activates the R cassette movement belt output and at the same
does not move with active belt is active but the motion time checks that the relative encoder is sending a feedback signal that is proportional
control. is not detected through the to the applied speeds. The alarm is generated when motion is detected or the speed
encoder feedback. is not aligned to that described in section 11.3.5. This phenomenon is more evident in
the first instants of motion due to mechanical inertia. When the difference between
the applied speed (Sp. ref. at the start up) and the speed detected (potentiometer
• encoder slip
197 Left belt cassette encoder The L cassette movement The main processor activates the L cassette movement belt output and at the same
does not move with active belt is active but the motion time checks that the relative encoder is sending a feedback signal that is proportional
control. is not detected through the to the applied speed. The alarm is generated when motion is detected or the speed is
encoder feedback. not aligned to that described in section 11.3.5. This phenomenon is more evident in the
• encoder slip

Rev. 2

Cau se of the alarm Corrective measures
198 The cross subdivision The cross subdivision The main processor activates the cross subdivision movement output and at the
potentiometer does not move movement control is active same time checks the relative potentiometer is sending feedback signals in proportion
with active control. but the potentiometer to the speed applied. The alarm is generated when motion is detected or the speed is
feedback does not detect the not aligned to that described in section 11.3.5. This phenomenon is more evident in the
motion. first instants of motion due to mechanical inertia. When the difference between the
201 Angulation potentiometer in There is no angulation The main processor did not activate the angulation movement but has detected
movement without request movement control but motion through the potentiometer feedback that there has been a movement greater than
is detected through the what was inserted in cell 452. The cause might be due to:
potentiometer feedback. • motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the
processor)
• excessive noise on the potentiometer signal
• break in the electric potentiometer connection circuit.
If the electrical potentiometer circuit is damaged, the alarm is generated when the
table is turned on. Thus as the circuit is broken, the pull up of the reference "moves"
the input as soon as it is powered up.

Rev. 2
202 Scan potentiometer in There has been no scan The main processor did not activate the scan movement but has detected through
movement without request. movement output but motion the potentiometer feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was
has been detected by the inserted in cell 453. The cause might be due to:
processor)
203 Tilting potentiometer in There is no tilting movement The main processor did not activate the tilting movement but has detected through
movement without control. control but motion is detected the potentiometer feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was
through the potentiometer inserted in cell 454. The cause might be due to:
feedback. • motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the
processor)

Rev. 2

204 Longitudinal tabletop There is no longitudinal The main processor did not activate the longitudinal tabletop movement but has
potentiometer in movement tabletop movement control detected through the potentiometer feedback that there has been a movement
without control. but movement is detected greater than what was inserted in cell 455. The cause might be due to:
from the potentiometer • motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the
feedback. processor)
206 Transversal tabletop There is no tabletop The main processor did not activate the tabletop movement but has detected through
potentiometer in movement movement output but motion the potentiometer feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was
without request. is detected by the inserted in cell 456. The cause might be due to:
processor)

Rev. 2

207 SID potentiometer in There is no SID movement The main processor did not activate the SID movement but has detected through the
movement without request output but motion is detected potentiometer feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was
processor)
212 Compression force There is no compression The compressor is in park but, through the potentiometer feedback, it is seen that
potentiometer in movement control but motion is detected there has been a movement greater than the dead band (cell 226). The cause might
without request. through the potentiometer have been a contact of the compression device with an obstacle or by the break in
feedback the electric potentiometer circuit.

Rev. 2

213 Grid 1 potentiometer in There is no grid 1 movement The main processor did not activate the grid movement but has detected through the
movement without request output but motion is detected potentiometer feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was
processor)
214 Gripper potentiometer in There is no gripper movement The main processor did not activate the gripper movement but has detected through
movement without control. control but motion is detected the potentiometer feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was
processor)

Rev. 2

215 Cross subdivision There is no cross subdivision The main processor did not activate the cross subdivision movement but has
potentiometer in movement movement control but motion detected through the potentiometer feedback that there has been a movement
without request. is detected through the greater than what was inserted in cell 449. The cause might be due to:
processor)
216 Shutter potentiometer in There is no shutter The main processor did not activate the shutters movement but has detected
movement without request. movement output but motion through the potentiometer feedback that there has been a movement greater than
is detected through the what was inserted in cell 449. The cause might be due to:
processor)

Rev. 2

218 Transversal tabletop The transversal tabletop The movement of the tabletop is not a controlled axis but an ON-OFF movement.
movement over max error. movement exceeded the error The speed control is executed based on an average reference value inserted in cell
value set in cell 447. 235. Since this is an average value that does not take account of different working
conditions, an error is accumulated during the movement. The maximum value that
this error can reach is inserted in cell 447. The alarm may be caused by:
• a mechanical slipping of the potentiometer
• a mechanical hardening of the movement
• a motor power supply voltage with a tolerance 10% higher than the rated
voltage.
220 SID movement over max The SID movement exceeded The movement of the SID is not a controlled axis but an ON-OFF movement. The
error. the error value set in cell 448. speed control is executed based on an average reference value inserted in cell 236.
Since this is an average value that does not take account of different working
conditions, an error is accumulated during the movement. The maximum value that
this error can reach is inserted in cell 448. The alarm may be caused by:
• a mechanical slipping of the potentiometer
• a mechanical hardening of the movement
• a motor power supply voltage with a tolerance 10% higher than the rated
voltage.
226 Compressor down output No compressor movement The processor activates the compressor down output but the HW confirmation that
active without feedback input feedback present when down the compressor is in motion (input X32-1 Input board active 0 V) is not there.
control is active.
227
22 7 Compressor outputs not The compressor movement The processor has not activated the compressor lift or descent but the input X32-1
active with feedback active. feedback is active without Input board is active at 0 V.
movement commands.

Rev. 2

228 Compressor up output active No compressor movement The processor activates the compressor lift output but the HW confirmation that the
without feedback input feedback present when lift compressor is in motion (input X32-1 Input board active 0 V) is not there.
control is active.
2 29 Grid 2 potmeter in movement There is no grid 2 movement The main processor did not activate the grid movement but has detected through the
without request output but motion is detected potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was inserted
through the potmeter in cell 449. The cause might be because:
processor)
• excessive noise on the potmeter signal
• break in the electrical potmeter connection circuit.
If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged, the alarm is generated when the table is
turned on. Thus as the circuit is broken, the pull up of the reference "moves" the input
as soon as it is powered up.
231 Single Fault open without SF circuit is open but no This alarm is generated if the SF circuit is not open within the time set in cell 451,
active inputs movement control is while there is a request for movement or X-ray emission. That might be caused by a
recognised. fault in a command key on the panel mounted on the table or by a joystick on the
touch screen console which do not correctly switch the SF circuit and the input
closure. Another reason for the alarm might be due to the opening of the SF circuit
(input X13-24 Input board).
Check the continuity of the various modules crossed by the SF series circuit:
• command console: X8-12 with X41-7 (series joystick)
• pedal command: X41-7 with X41-5 (series X-ray commands)
• optional command:
co mmand: X42-7 with X42-5 (closure jumper)
• table-
table - mounted control: X16-23 with X16-24 (series keys)
• general terminal block: X0-25 with X0-24 (closure jumper).

Rev. 2

232 Single Fault close with active One or more movement This alarm is generated if the SF circuit is not open within the time set in cell 451,
inputs controls present but SF while there is a request for movement or X-ray emission. That might be caused by
circuit is not active (closed). a fault in a command key on the panel mounted on the table or by a joystick on the
touch screen console which do not correctly switch the SF circuit and the input
closure.
240 Right cass. belt movement Right cass. belt motor The R cassette belt movement control circuit is protected with a HW current
overcurrent. movement exceeded limitation circuit (R4 resistor activation board). If this limit is exceeded, the
maximum current threshold. optoisolator U1 sends 0 V to the integrated circuit D26 pin 18 (CPU board). The
exceeding of this limit might be caused by a mechanical hardening of the movement
or by an electrical fault on one of the components (M5 motor, D1 driver, U1
optoisolator).
241 Left cass. belt movement Left cass. belt motor The L cassette belt movement control circuit is protected with a HW current
overcurrent. movement exceeded limitation circuit (R8 resistor activation board). If this limit is exceeded, the
maximum current threshold. optoisolator U2 sends 0 V to the integrated circuit D26 pin 17 (CPU board). The
or by an electrical fault on one of the components (M6 motor, D2 driver, U2
optoisolator).
242 Shutters overcurrent Shutters movement motor The shutter cross subdivision movement control is protected by a HW current
exceeded maximum current limitation circuit (resistor R20 activation board). If this limit is exceeded, the
threshold. optoisolator U4 sends 0 V to the integrated circuit D26 pin 16 (CPU board). The
or by an electrical fault on one of the components (M8 motor, D5 and D6 drivers,
U4 optoisolator).

Rev. 2

243 Cross subdivision overcurrent Cross subdivision movement The cross subdivision movement control is protected by a HW current limitation
motor exceeded maximum circuit (resistor R12 activation board). If this limit is exceeded, the optoisolator U3
current threshold. sends 0 V to the integrated circuit D26 pin 15 (CPU board). The exceeding of this limit
might be caused by a mechanical hardening of the movement or by an electrical fault
on one of the components (M10 motor, D3 and D4 drivers, U3 optoisolator).
244
24 4 Grid 2 overcurrent Grid 2 movement motor The grid 2 movement control is protected by a HW current limitation circuit (resistor
exceeded maximum current R19 activation PCB). If this limit is exceeded, the optoisolator U4 sends 0 V to the
threshold. integrated circuit D26 pin 16 (CPU PCB). The exceeding of this limit might be caused
by a mechanical hardening of the movement or by an electrical fault on one of the
components (M8 motor, D5 and D6 drivers, U4 optoisolator).
300 Cassette loading error The cassette did not reach When the cassette transport command is activated, the processor wants to recognise
the format recognition the activation of the size reading photocell input (X14-2 Input board) active within 1
photocell within 1 sec. sec. The alarm might be caused by a fault of the format reading photocell circuit or by
the cassette moving too slowly. If the cause is the latter, check the cassette input
presser, the state of the cassette, the gripping pressure and the state of the belts
driving the cassette.
301 Grid 1 movement timeout The grid 1 did not reach the The gripping opening/grid 1 parking has a time out of 8 secs.. If the set point is not
destination (parking or reached the cause might be:
position 0) within 8 secs. • an electrical potentiometer fault or the mechanical slipping of the same.
• dead band too small (cell 227) cause of repeated oscillations at the set point
• break in the movement circuit (engine M7, fuse F23, driver D7).

Rev. 2

302 Gripping movement timeout The grippers do not reach the The gripping opening/closure movement has a time out of 5 secs. If the set point is
destination (cassette closed or not reached the cause might be:
open) within 8 seconds. • electrical potentiometer fault or mechanical slipping of the same (only for the
opening)
• gripping switch fault (S33 with input X14-4 Input board) (only for the closure)
• dead band too small (cell 228) cause of repeated oscillations at the set point (only
for the opening)
• break in the movement circuit (engine M9, fuse F22, driver D8).
303 Cassette size photosensor Cassette size photosensor is The cassette presence photosensor (input X14-1 Input board) must be deactivated
not released obscured for longer than within 5 sec of the cassette insertion command being activated. The alarm might be
5 secs. caused by a fault of the photosensor circuit or by the excessively slow movement of
the cassette. If the cause is the latter, check the cassette input presser, the state of
the cassette, the gripping pressure and the state of the belts driving the cassette.
304 Simultaneous drivers enable The SW controlled the The opening and gripping commands direct to the driver D8 (activation board) to pins
gripping open / close control 5 and 7 have been sent simultaneously. This causes a short circuit that damages the
drivers simultaneously. components. The circuits dependent on integrated D6 pin 11 and 12 Output board
should be checked.
305 Grid 2 movement timeout The grid 2 did not reach the The gripping opening/grid parking has a time out of 8 secs. If the set point is not
destination (parking or reached the cause might be:
position 0) within 8 secs. • an electrical potmeter fault or the mechanical slipping of the same.
• dead band too small (cell 229) cause of repeated oscillations at the set point
break in the movement circuit (engine M8, driver D5).

Rev. 2

500 RAM-EEPROM: data missing A functioning failure detected On power-up, the data in EEPROM are compared with those in the RAM. If the check
on Eeprom. detects a mismatch between the data and the checksum, an alarm is generated. The
Eeprom or the RAM must be replaced.
501 RAM-EEPROM: writing It was not possible to In copying Eeprom (cell 702) the writing is not complete. Replace the Eeprom; it is
timeout transfer data to Eeprom. probably defective.
503 RAM-EEPROM: wrong Data in Eeprom cannot be It was not possible to read the data during Eeprom copying (cell 701). Repeat the
Eeprom reading. read. operation or replace the RAM.
907 Button or joystick active at A joystick or double control A key is pressed when the table is powered up. The cause might be due to an
switch on. button are active when the operator error (key or joystick pressed during power up) or by a defective key.
table is powered up. Check that the touch screen console keys, keys of the table-mounted panel and pedal
have the NO contact open in the rest position.
920 Ethernet touch screen ETH network link failure Data link is failing on cabinet side. Check Ethernet connection and eventually CPU
timeout between cabinet CPU and board.
touch screen console.
930 (*) CAN communication timeout Collimator does not respond Check CAN cable (X8A) from cabinet CPU board to collimator.
from collimator to commands.
999 (*) Data lost in RAM. Check Data no longer in RAM. On powering up the RAM is seen to have no data. This might be caused by a defect
battery in the RAM or the buffer battery with insufficient voltage. Check the ends of the
battery on the CPU board to see that there is a voltage of 3.6 V. Change the battery
if the voltage is not high enough or change the RAM if the defect persists.
1800 Ethernet cabinet CPU Ethernet link failure between Data link is failing on touch screen side. Check Ethernet connection and eventually
(*) timeout cabinet CPU and touch touch screen.
screen console.

Rev. 2
20.2 Troubleshooting for faults or malfunctions not recognised by the processor
20.2.1 Table
Fault or malfunction Reason Corrective measures

During the tilting, the message The I.I. does not escape the ascent The tilting function is designed in such a way that the movement continues without
"I.I. Limit" is often displayed". band and enters the collision zone. stopping if it the I.I. gets too close to the floor. To ensure this condition an ascent
band is set (cell 208) positioned over the I.I.-floor height. When the I.I. enters the
ascent band, the tilting algorithm is modified and replaced by an anticollision
movement. If the band is too small, the I.I. might not manage to escape and enter the
safety zone. The data entered in cell 208 must therefore be increased.
The movements controlled Check parameters not regulated If the values of the proportional, derived and integral gains are not properly regulated
with the table PDI (tilting, properly. the movements lose their smoothness. Before modifying the parameters take note of
scan, angulation, longitudinal that described in section 11.2.1. The axis gain values that present the defect are
tabletop) are not smooth. modified by reducing the set value with steps of approximately 5% until movements
without jerks and vibrations are achieved. Remember that too great a reduction of
the gains makes the positioning imprecise.
The message "LIMIT BARRIER" Input X0-17 is not connected to Check that input X0-17 is connected to 0 V in the absence of safety barriers installed
is displayed
di splayed on power-
power - up 0V. in the room. If barriers are present, check that the devices are efficient and are not
activated by elements of the table or outside it.

Rev. 2

The compressor is not brought Wrong adjustment of the After checking the proper functioning of the circuit relating to the compressor unit,
into the field. compression force minimum access the potentiometer adjustment routine and cell 123, check that the value of the
potentiometer. potentiometer with pressure-free cone is equal to or less than the stored value. If
this not the case, an effective way for checking whether the non-movement of the
compressor is due to this reason when the table is functioning normally is to increase
the value of the compression force using the dedicated key until the maximum and
then to activate the descent movement. If the movement is activated, the minimum
value of the potentiometer must then be adjusted.
The horizontal position of the The tilting potentiometer has not Carry out the adjustment of the tilting potentiometer very carefully, as described in
table is not correct. been correctly calibrated. section 10.1.4.
The vertical or Trendelembourg The tilting potentiometer has not Carry out the adjustment of the tilting potentiometer very carefully, as described in
position of the table is not been correctly calibrated. section 10.1.4.
correct.
The equipment does not come Lack of power supply to the logical Check for single-phase voltage on the primary of transformer T2. Verify that the
on. circuits. circuit breaker Q1 is closed. Check that the fuse F4 is not broken.
The tomo layer is not correct. The geometry of some of the As the tomography of the Apollo EZ table is completely electronic, the layer position
table's mechanical components is is calculated by means of an algorithm that takes account of the equipment's
different. mechanical dimensions. A defect like this can be carried out by modifying the data
stored in cell 438.

Rev. 2
20.2.2 Spot Film Device
The movements controlled Check parameters not regulated If the values of the proportional, derived and integral gains are not properly regulated
with PDI of the Spot Film properly. the movements lose their smoothness. Before modifying the parameters take note of
Device (longitudinal cassette, that described in section 11.2.1. The axis gain values that present the defect are
transversal cassette and modified by reducing the set value with steps of approximately 5% until movements
shutters)
shutt ers) are not fluid. without jerks and vibrations are achieved. Remember that too great a reduction of
the gains makes the positioning imprecise.
The cassette gripping closure The control circuit is defective. Check fuse F22 positioned on the board A10 on the Spot Film Device. If it is seen to
movement is not working. be broken check that the gripping devices do not hit the walls of the Spot Film Device
violently, on opening.
Check that pressure switch S33 is not open (input X14-4), when the gripping devices
do not lock on the cassette.
The cassette is not recognised. Wrong use of the cassette or Verify the correspondence between the type of cassette used (cm or inches) and the
defect in the size reading data entered into cell 257. Verify that the cassette size used is one of those
photosensor. permitted (see sizes and divisions table in cm section 4.2 and inches section 4.3.
If the above is correct, check the functioning of the size reading photosensor (input
X14-2).

Rev. 2
The cassette with height of 43 The gripping device opening is not The gripping devices do not open wide enough to accommodate the cassette with the
cm (17")
(1 7") is inserted with big enough. maximum height. Repeat the gripping device opening potentiometer adjustment
difficulty in the Spot Film procedure (see section 10.1.10). Verify the value of cell 228. If this value is excessive the
Device. grippers may not open enough.
The horizontal radiogram The transversal movement of the Check the adjustment of the cross subdivision potentiometer section 10.1.11.
subdivision line (cross cassette is wrong. Check the data in cells 459 and 460 and modify it remembering that:
subdivision program - optional) • if the separation line is too wide, the two numbers of the same quantity must be
is not the required size. reduced
• if the separation line is too narrow, the two numbers of the same quantity must be
increased
• modifying the 2 numbers of different quantities modifies the centering of the
cassette.
The fluoroscopic image shows The grid centering is not correct. The central position of the grid is not correct, it must be modified by changing the
one side darker than
th an the other. parameter in cell 220.

Rev. 2
The fluoro exposure time is The positioning of the cassette, of The X-ray request to the generator control is sent when the cassette, shutters and
long. the shutters or of the collimator collimator reach the correct position. It must therefore be checked which of these
does not occur in the regular three movements is excessively slow in reaching the set point.
times. If the defect is on the cassette or shutter movements, check to see if there are
mechanical obstacles or take measures on the gains as described in the section 11.2.1.
If the defect is on the positioning of the collimator axles, the cause of this defect
might be due to:
A - HW adjustment of the gain circuit is wrong
The trimmers, R38 width, R48 height or R58 iris, must be adjusted as described
in the section 1.1
B - Dead band to small
The axle positioning dead band is too short, therefore the movement cannot stop
on the set point. This might be caused by a degradation of the potentiometer or
the increase in mechanical backlashes. The value in the cell relating to the axle
with the defect (229 width, 230 height, 231 iris) must be increased. The increase
in this value however increases the positioning tolerance thereby diminishing the
precision. It is therefore also possible to adjust the slowdown cells (232 width, 233
height, 234 iris), which reduce the speed of the axle before reaching the set point,
by a quantity equal to the value set. The increase of this parameter does not
influence the positioning precision but has, as its only drawback, an increase in
the positioning time on the axle.

Rev. 2

Service Manual – Maintenance and cleaning
Rev. 2
21 MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING

CLEA NING
As all electrical equipment, this unit requires not only a correct usage, but also maintenance and
checks on a regular basis.
This precaution ensures efficient, long-lasting functioning.
Apollo EZ contains mechanical parts such as, bearings, cables and springs that are subject to
natural wear and tear.
To prevent any possibility of risk to the patient or operator, the equipment must be checked
and maintained regularly.
The electromechanical and electronic elements contained in the units must be adjusted
correctly to ensure they work perfectly and to give quality radiographic images, to provide top
levels of electrical safety and contain the dispersion of X-rays within the preestablished limits.
Note
The service technician must pay attention to everything that affects the electrical
safety of the equipment and make sure to reset all the conditions related to it, which
may have been affected during the repair, asking the user to repeat the electrical
safety test every time the operation involved the replacement of important parts or
the intervention has affected the design arrangements to ensure electrical safety.
Maintenance can be carried out by the operator (paragraph 21.1) or by the authorised technician
(paragraph 21.2).

Rev. 2
21.1 M aintenance the operator can carry out

The operator can control the following items:
Frequency Type of check Method
Daily Functioning of the indicator lights Visual

inspection
Daily Functioning of joysticks located on the touch screen Visual
console and on the panel on the side of the table inspection
Daily Correspondence between the radiated field and the light Visual
field of the collimator and its alignment compared to the inspection
Spot Film Device
Daily Correspondence between radiated field – format image Visual
receptor inspection
Daily Functionality of the compression cone release device Practical
control
Daily Absence of contrast liquid residuals Visual
inspection
Daily Check smooth flow and noise of movements Practical
inspection
Daily Check functionality of safety device Practical
control
Monthly Integrity of equipment and labels Visual
inspection
Warning
In case of irregularities, high noisiness of motorised components, or failures, the
operator must immediately notify the Technical Staff.

Rev. 2
21.2 Maintenance that can be carried out by the Authorised

Technician
It is recommended that a technician authorised by Villa Sistemi Medicali services the equipment
once a year to ensure it always stays in tip-top condition.
Warning
Preventive and/or corrective operations must only be carried out by personnel
authorised and properly trained on part replacement and maintenance.
At the maintenance stage, the performance of the equipment is checked and if possible
adjusted in line with the indications in the previous chapters as summarised in the following
table:
Type of check Method

Removal of the casing and cleaning of the parts underneath with Visual inspection
particular attention to the Spot Film Device covers
X-ray beam centering check Section 19.2
X-ray field - light field correspondence check Section 19.2
Cassette size subdivision control Section 19.1
Checking of the movements and operability of the touch screen console Visual inspection
and the table-mounted control
Checking of the tilting, angulation and tabletop centering Visual inspection
Checking of the chains tension (*) Chapter 6
Check of the motor belts Practical control
Check of the state of main beam bearings, SID Visual inspection
Check of the state of the Spot Film Device gripping movement belts Visual inspection
(*) Note
Chains are tensioned in factory with an optimized force: in case of doubt, before
making any intervention, contact Villa Sistemi Medicali Service Support.
Warning
Only use original spare parts if components need to be replaced.
The relevant replacement instruction is supplied with the spare part.
Note
In case of replacement of the power supply cable, please refer to paragraph 5.2 for
cable features and paragraph 6.5 – point 9 – for the connection.
Warning
For cleaning and disinfecting operations carried out directly by the Authorised
Technician, you are recommended to adhere to the information reported in Chapter 8
of the User's manual.

Rev. 2
21.3 Parts to be replaced periodically

The expected lifetime of Apollo EZ angulation chain is 10 years. After the operation time of
10 years, the following part must be replaced:
Code Description Replace after Installation date Replacement

date
6690702200 Angulation chain 10 years

(*)
(*) Note
Replacement of angulation chain requires the tools kit code 6690702100.
Note
Spare part code includes replacement instruction.
At replacement, Field Service Engineering will fill the column "Next replacement date" adding
10 years to the replacement date in both User's and Service Manuals.
Reason of the
Angulation chain Next Execute by
replacement: Date /
replacement
replacement date replacement date organization
corrective maintenance Signature
(dd/mm/yyyy) (mm/yyyy) (FSE name)
/ planned maintenance

Service Manual – Touch screen configuration as "Console 1" or "Console 2"
Rev. 2
22 TOUCH SCREEN CONFIGURATION

CONFIGU RATION AS "CONSOLE 1"
1"
OR "CONSOLE 2"
To configure the touch screen as "console 1" or "console 2", proceed as described below:
1. Switch OFF the system.
2. Keep Compressor and SID joysticks acivated in down position for a few seconds while
switching the equipment ON. The following menu will be displayed:
Configuration MENU
Console ID
MSG language
HW Inputs Test
3. Press "Console ID" button, the touch screen will show a numerical keyboard asking to
input the access key:
Enter Key 1 2 3
4 5 6
ESC 7 8 9
C 0 -
.
0
4. Input the key code "20090".

Rev. 2
ESC
touch screen will show the message:
<< KEY OK >>
and the following screen will be displayed:
Select Console ID:
Console 1
Console 2
Now configured as: Console X
Reboot
6. Press the key identifying the desired console number (Console 1 or Console 2). The last
line will be updated with the new selection.
Reboot
7. Hit the key on the touchscreen: the table will restart in normal
mode.

Rev. 2
22.1 Automatic voice MSG language setup

As described in the User’s Manual, TSC "Console 1" is equipped with an intercom device so to
establish audio communication between operator in the control room and patient and/or
bystander in the examination room.
The installer engineer can select 3 languages, as per customer preference, for the automatic
voice messages (MSG) which can be activated by the operator during PREP and RAD phases.
The audio messages are factory pre-loaded, format wav, there is a list of up to 14 languages
available, the engineer has to select 3 among them, which will become available to the operator
menu.
The main available languages are: English (EN), French (FR), Spanish (SP), Italian (IT),
German (DE), Russian (RU), Arabian (AR), Chinese (ZH). Other languages might be available
upon request.
Some languages may be available both with male (m) or female (f) voice.
In order to select the MSG languages, execute steps 1 and 2 as in the previous paragraph, then
press "MSG Language" button. The following menu will be displayed:
Select Voice Messages Language:
Language 1 Language 2 Language 3

EN[m] DE[f] FR[f] Save
EN[m] IT[f]
Reboot
EN[f] DE[f]
FR[m] RU[f]
FR[f] AR[m]
ES[m] ZH[f]
ES[f] HU[f]
IT[m] PL[f]
Select the language for language 1, 2 3 fields, then reboot the table.

Rev. 2

Service Manual – Firmware upgrade
Rev. 2
23 FIRMWARE UPGRADE
23.1 Touch screen console firmware upgrade

To upgrade the touch screen console software, it is necessary an empty USB memory key
FAT 32 formatted.
Proceed as follow:
1. Copy the ".tar" updated file on the key.
2. Verify that the file has been correctly copied into the memory key and that no other files
are present on said key.
3. Switch OFF the Apollo table.
4. Insert the key in the USB plug on the rear side of the touch screen.
5. Switch ON the table and wait until the following screen is displayed:
Mode
Firmware update
SW USB BOOT ver. X.XX (DD-MM-YYYY)
New firmware on USB device found. Proceed to install?
YES NO
Warning
Do NOT switch OFF the system and do NOT remove the USB memory key during
the update procedure.
REMOVE the USB memory key ONLY when the system is completely OFF.

Rev. 2
YES
6. Press key ; the load of the updated file will start.
The following screen is displayed:
Mode
Firmware update
SW USB Boot ver. X.XX (DD-MM-YYYY)
Installation in progress. Please wait

WARNING: do not switch off or remove the USB device
At the end of the procedure, the following screen will be displayed:
Mode
Firmware update
SW USB BOOT ver. X.XX (DD-MM-YYYY)
Installation completed. Switch off the unit

Rev. 2
7. Switch OFF the Apollo table and remove the USB key.
8. Set switch 4 in the DIP-switch assembly in the cabinet CPU PCB to ON.
9. Switch ON the table and access to edit position 719 as described on paragraph 11.5.
10. Reset this cell: all the alarm memory and anatomic pre-set positions stored in the Flash
eprom will be reset.
11. Switch OFF the unit and restore the standard operation mode (all switches in the
DIP-switch assembly in the cabinet CPU PCB to OFF).

Rev. 2
23.2 Cabinet CPU firmware upgrade

To upgrade the cabinet CPU firmware, it is necessary an empty USB memory key FAT 32
formatted.
Proceed as follow:
1. Copy the ".usb" update file on the key.
2. Verify that the file has been correctly copied into the memory key and that no other ".usb"
files are present on said key.
4. Position all the switch of the group of DIP-switches (Q2) on the CPU at ON.
5. Insert the key in the USB plug J3 (USB Host connector).
6. Switch ON the table and wait until the red LED H8 is steady ON.
Warning
8. Restore the standard operation mode (all switches in the DIP-switch assembly in the
cabinet CPU PCB to OFF).
H8 J3
Q2

Rev. 2
23.3 Service data backup on USB stick

It is possible to save the unit data on a USB stick inserted in one of the two ports available on
the Touch Screen console.
The saved data will include:
• Values of cells 100, 200, 300, 400
• Unit cycle counters
• Alarm history.
To save data on USB stick, perform the following steps:

1. Turn off the equipment, turn switch 4 in the DIP-switch assembly in the CPU board to
ON.
2. Turn on the equipment and wait for the cells 711-719 Service page loading, then insert the
USB stick into one of the two ports on the Touch Screen console.
3. Select cell 718 to save the data (the PWD1 access code will be required). The correct start
of the operation is signaled by the following message:
<< USB-key data saving: Download in progress…
DO NOT REMOVE USB-KEY! >>
4. Wait about a minute until the following message appears:
<< USB-key data saving DONE! >>
Then remove the USB stick.
On USB stick, the following three text files have been saved:
• SNxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx_srv.txt containing the values of the cells 100, 200, 300, 400
• SNxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx_cyc.txt containing the values of the counters of the table cycles
• SNxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx_dgn.txt containing the log of the diagnosis.
where in place of "xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx" there is the system Serial Number.

Rev. 2
23.4 Touch Screen collimator

c ollimator firmware upgrade
To upgrade the Collimator firmware, it is necessary an empty USB memory key FAT 32
formatted.
Proceed as follow:
1. Copy the ".bin" update file on the key.
2. Verify that the file has been correctly copied into the memory key and that no other ".bin"
files are present on said key.
4. Remove the collimator rear panel to access the USB connector.
5. Insert the key in the USB plug.
6. Switch ON the table and wait until the start-up procedure is completed.
Warning
8. Mount back the rear panel of the collimator.

Service Manual – Touch screen calibration procedure
Rev. 2
24 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION

CALIBRA TION PROCEDURE
To calibrate the touch screen, proceed as follow:
1. During the system initialisation sequence ("Loading. Please wait…" message displayed on
the Apollo touch screen), move at the same time the collimator and compressor joysticks
down.
Just keep the joysticks pressed for a few seconds.

2. Wait until the following screen will be displayed:
Microwindows Calibration
Touch the cross hairs firmly to
calibrate your handheld

Service Manual – Touch screen calibration procedure
Rev. 2
3. Tap with a finger on the cross-shaped symbol present on the upper-left corner; a new
point of reference will be shown on the upper-right corner.
4. Tap on the new point of reference.
5. Repeat for each corner to complete the calibration process.
After the fourth point has been tapped, the calibration process will be ended and the touch
screen will automatically enter the standard operation mode.
Warning
When touch screen calibration has started, it must be completed, otherwise the touch
screen will not work properly.

Service Manual – Wiring diagrams and drawings
Rev. 2
25 WIRING DIAGRAMS AND DRAWINGS

The connections of the cables used on the Apollo EZ tables are made with the use of
connectors.
The wiring diagrams are shown with references on them detailing:
Pin number
Connection number

Rev. 2
25.1 List of wiring diagrams and drawings
1. Power supply diagram
2. Functional diagram
d iagram
3. Cabinet layout – 4 - way tabletop version
4. Cabinet layout – 2 - way tabletop version
5. A1 CPU board layout
6. A1 CPU board wiring diagram

di agram
7. A2 Input board layout
8. A2 Input board wiring diagram
9. A3 Output board layout
10. A3 Output board wiring diagram
11. A4 Spot Film Device motor driver board layout
12. A4 Spot Film Device motor driver board wiring diagram
13. A7 Filter board wiring diagram and layout

la yout
14. A8 Table Side Operation board layout
15. A8 Table Side Operation board wiring diagram
16. A10 Spot Film Device board layout
17. A10 Spot Film Device wiring diagram
18. A11 Base unit connector board layout
19. A11 Base unit connector

connector board wiring diagram
20. A12 Cabinet connector board layout
21. A12 Cabinet connector board wiring diagram

Rev. 2
22. A13 Angulation connector board layout
23. A13 Angulation connector wiring diagram
24. A14 Touch Screen CPU board layout
25. A14 Touch Screen CPU board wiring diagram
26. A17 Tabletop control board wiring diagram and layout
27. A27
A27 Hardware
Hardw are Single Fault board layout
28. A27
A27 Hardware Single Fault board wiring diagram

Rev. 2

Service Manual - Wiring diagrams and drawings
Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
Power supply diagram 1
Code 39849008 - Rev. 0 Page 1 of 1

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
Functional drawing 2
Code 39849202
39849 202 - Rev. 1 Page 1 of 17
17

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
Code 398492002
39849 2002 - Rev. 1 Page 2 of 17
17

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
Code 398492002
39849 2002 - Rev. 1 Page 3 of 17
17

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
Code 398492002
39849 2002 - Rev. 1 Page 4 of 17
17

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
Code 398492002
39849 2002 - Rev. 1 Page 5 of 17
17

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
Code 398492002
39849 2002 - Rev. 1 Page 6 of 17
17

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
Code 398492002
39849 2002 - Rev. 1 Page 7 of 17
17

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
Code 398492002
39849 2002 - Rev. 1 Page 8 of 17
17

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
Code 398492002
39849 2002 - Rev. 1 Page 9 of 17
17

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
Code 398492002
39849 2002 - Rev. 1 Page 10 of 17
17

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
Code 398492002
39849 2002 - Rev. 1 Page 11 of 17
17

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
Code 398492002
39849 2002 - Rev. 1 Page 12 of 17
17

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
Functional
Func tional drawing 2
Code 398492002
39849 2002 - Rev. 1 Page 13 of 17
17

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
Code 398492002
39849 2002 - Rev. 1 Page 14 of 17
17

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
Code 398492002
39849 2002 - Rev. 1 Page 15 of 17
17

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
Code 398492002
39849 2002 - Rev. 1 Page 16 of 17
17

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
Code 398492002
39849 2002 - Rev. 1 Page 17 of 17
17

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
Cabinet layout
4- way tabletop version
3
Code 83848
8384853
530
530 - Rev. 0 (380/400V)
Page 1 of 1
Code 83848590
83848 590 – Rev. 0 (415/480V)

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
Cabinet layout
2 - way tabletop version
4
Code 83848545
83848 545 - Rev. 0 Page 1 of 1

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
A1 CPU board layout 5
Code 58848436
58848 436 - Rev. 4 Page 1 of 1

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
A1 CPU board
wiring diagram
6
Code 39849162
39849 162 - Rev. 0 Page 1 of 11

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
A1 CPU board
wiring diagram
6
Code 39849162
39849 162 - Rev. 0 Page 2 of 11

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
A1 CPU board
wiring diagram
6
Code 39849162
39849 162 - Rev. 0 Page 3 of 11

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
A1 CPU board
wiring diagram
6
Code 39849
39849 162 - Rev. 0 Page 4 of 11

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
A1 CPU board
wiring diagram
6
Code 39849162
39849 162 - Rev. 0 Page 5 of 11

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
A1 CPU board
wiring diagram
6
Code 39849162
39849 162 - Rev. 0 Page 6 of 11

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
A1 CPU board
wiring diagram
6
Code 39849162
39849 162 - Rev. 0 Page 7 of 11

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
A1 CPU board
wiring diagram
6
Code 39849162
39849 162 - Rev. 0 Page 8 of 9

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
A1 CPU board
wiring diagram
6
Code 39849162
39849 162 - Rev. 0 Page 9 of 11

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
A1 CPU board
wiring diagram
6
Code 39849162
39849 162 - Rev. 0 Page 10 of 11

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
A1 CPU board
wiring diagram
6
Code 39849162
39849 162 - Rev. 0 Page 11 of 11

Rev. 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
APOLLO EZ
H
A2 Input board
layout
la yout
7
Code 58838152 - Rev. 6 Page 1 of 1

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
A2 Input board
wiring diagram
8
Code 39849027 - Rev. 8 Page 1 of 4

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
A2 Input board
wiring diagram
8
Code 39849027 - Rev. 8 Page 2 of 4

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
A2 Input board
wiring diagram
8
Code
Co de 39849027 - Rev. 8 Page 3 of 4

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
A2 Input board
wiring diagram
8
Code 39849027 - Rev. 8 Page 4 of 4

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
A3 Output board
layout
9
Code 58848420
58848 420 - Rev. P Page 1 of 1

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
A3 Output board
wiring diagram
10
Code 39849194
39849 194 - Rev. 0 Page 1 of 8

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
A3 Output board
wiring diagram
10
Code 39849194
39849 194 - Rev. 0 Page 2 of 8

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
A3 Output board
wiring diagram
10
Code 39849194
39849 194 - Rev. 0 Page 3 of 8

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
A3 Output board
wiring diagram
10
Code 39849194
39849 194 - Rev. 0 Page 4 of 8

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
A3 Output board
wiring diagram
10
Code 39849194
39849 194 - Rev. 0 Page 5 of 8

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
A3 Output board
wiring diagram
10
Code 39849194
39849 194 - Rev. 0 Page 6 of 8

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
A3 Output board
wiring diagram
10
Code 39849194
39849 194 - Rev. 0 Page 7 of 8

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
A3 Output board
wiring diagram
10
Code 39849194
39849 194 - Rev. 0 Page 8 of 8

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
A4 Spot film device
motor driver board layout
11
Code 58838156 - Rev. 1 Page 1 of 1

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
A4 SFD motor driver board
wiring diagram
12
Code 39849031 - Rev. 1 Page 1 of 3

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
wiring diagram
12
Code 39849031 - Rev. 1 Page 2 of 3

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
wiring diagram
12
Code 39849031 - Rev. 1 Page 3 of 3

Rev. 2
1 2 3 4
C1 C2 C3
R S T
SCHEMA ELETTRICO
(ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM)
R S T
D
C1 C2 C3
3x1uF-275Vac-X2
F APOLLO
APO LLO EZ
A7 Filter board
wiring diagram & layout
13
Code 58848154 - Rev. 2 Page 1 of 1

Rev. 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C K1 X16
N2 N1 N3
58843050/
S13 S16 S6 S60 Z1 Z3
Z2 S10 S4
R1 LC
S18 S9 S12 S5 S2
S8
V4
S17 S7 S15 S11 S3
S14
C2
C1 V5 V2
V1 V3
R2
F APOLLO EZ
A8 Table Side operation
board layout
14
Code 58843050 - Rev. 1 Page 1 of 1

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
A8 Table Side Operation
board wiring diagram
15
Code 39849019 - Rev. 1 Page 1 of 1

Rev. 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B C5
Z1
X64
R12
R11
R15
U1 N3
58833015/ 2
R5
R8
C6
V5
X61 C11 C10 C13 X65
X50 7 8
1
N2
1 1
1
1 X54 1 X59 TP3
R10
TP2
R9
X60
R14
C12
R7
R6
R4
R25
3 1 C16
K1
R28
C8 N4
13 V9 V4 C3 C2 TP6
C7
X51 25 R2
R13
R26
R23
R27
R24
H1 C9
5 1 2 TP5
R20 C4
1 9 R21 C17
R35
R36
R31
R30
R34
R32
N5
V8
R3
1 X55 1 X58 X63 R1 C1
R29
12 10
V6
V7
R19
R18
R16
R22
6
X52 1
X19 X68 1 V1 U2 C18
R17
R40
C 1 C14
R38
R39
R37
X66 V2 V3 C21 TP4 C20 C19 X108 C15
X53 1 X56 1 X57 TP1
1
14
1
1
1
N1
1
X103 X102
VPOT
GRID
LONG
GRIP
SHUT
0V
1
X14 X62 X44 1 1
R33
1
X67 F22 F23 X101
F APOLLO EZ
A10 Spot Film Device
Devi ce
board layout
16
Code 58843054 - Rev. 0 Page 1 of 1

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
wiring diagram
17
Code 39849045 - Rev. 0 Page 1 of 2

Rev. 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
R18 V6
TP1 3,3k 1N4148
C15 C14
R19 V7 4,7nF 2,2nF
A 100k 1N4148
X62
R21
1 +12V 15ohm 2.5W
(Cassette inserted sensors)
N4A
Sensori cassetta inserita
2 trasmittitore
TLC274 R17 +12V
11
R20 100k
2,2k - 2 R16 K1
V9 1 100k
BD679 3
+ M5rele+
M5+
X63
4
M6rele-
scheda - 24Vac
Alimentazione
(Power supply
M6-
pcb - 24Vac)
1 +12V
ricevitore X44
2 V2
+12V
3 R22 1N4007 0Vac 1
4 100k
B 24Vac 2
2
V1
N1 W02G
R23 LM317 R1
11k TP3 +21V 10ohm 1W
+ -
3 1 1 4
GND
OUT IN
+12V V3
2
1N4007
R2
3
240ohm +
+12V C1
TP2
C18 47uF
0,1uF V4 C4 C3 C2
N4C N4B 1N4007 0,1uF + 10uF R3 + 10uF
4
TLC274 C17 C16 TLC274 3k9
4
10 + 0,1uF 0,1uF
8 5 +
C 9 -
6 -
7
R28 R24
11
1k 22k 11
R25 R26
2,2k 2,2k
R27 +12V
100k
V5
1N4007
H1
V8 C19 +12V LED
1N4148 1nF N2
D +12V LM7812 +21V
R29 3 1
GND
820k R38 R39 R40 OUT IN
3,3k 1,8k 3,3k
+12V U2
TP4
2
TLP504 C13 + C12 + C11 C10
1 8 0,1uF 22uF 22uF 0,1uF
N4D
4
TLC274 R30 R31 2 7 out

12 + 2,2k 1M
14 3 6
13 -
4 5
+12V
11
TP6
+12V
E R35 N5A C21 +12V

8
R32 R33 12k LM358 0,1uF

2,2k 10k 3 +
1
2 R37
-
C20 4,7k
non montato +12V
4
R36
2,2k
N5B
8
LM358
R34 5 TP5
+
2,2k 7
6 -
4
F APOLLO EZ
wiring diagram
17
Code 39849045 - Rev. 0 Page 2 of 2

Rev. 2
1 2 3 4
B
4 3 4 3 4 3
2 1 2 1 2 1
1
X83 X84 X88
2 2 2 2 X97
C
X20
1 1 1 1
X75 X77 X78 X81
V1 V2
1
2 2
2
X96
1 1 1
X92 X93
1
X98
D X46
F APOLLO EZ
A11 Base unit connector
board layout
18
Code 58841050 - Rev. 3 Page 1 of 1

Rev. 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
X83.1
X83.2
X83.3
X83.4
X84.1
X84.2
X84.3
X84.4
X88.1
X88.2
X88.3
X88.4
X97.1 X20.15
X97.2 X20.14
X97.3 X20.13
X97.4 X20.11
X97.5 X20.10
X20.7
X97.6 X20.6
B X97.7 X20.5
X97.8 X20.4
X97.9 X20.3
X20.2
X20.1
X46.19
X46.6
X46.21
X46.8
X46.20
D X46.7
X46.25
X46.18
X46.12
V2
X46.5 MR852
V1
MR852
E
X92.1
X93.1
X96.1
X98.1
X98.2
X75.1
X77.1
X78.1
X81.1
X92.2
X93.2
X96.2
X98.3
X98.4
X98.5
X98.6
X75.2
X77.2
X78.2
X81.2
F APOLLO EZ
A11 Base unit connector
19
Code 39849010 - Rev. 0 Page 1 of 1
Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
A12 Cabinet connector
board layout
20
Code 58848404
58848 404 - Rev. 0 Page 1 of
of 1

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
A12 Cabinet connector
21
Code 39849190
39849 190 - Rev. 0 Page 1 of 1

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
A13 Angulation connector
board layout
22
Code 58843052 - Rev. 5 Page 1 of 1

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
A13 Angulation connector
23
Code 39849021 - Rev. 2 Page 1 of 1

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
A14 Touch Screen CPU
board layout
24
Code 58848442
58848 442 - Rev. 2 Page 1 of 1

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
25
Code 39849187
39849 187 - Rev. 2 Page 1 of 6

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
25
Code 39849187
39849 187 - Rev. 2 Page 2 of 6

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
25
Code 39849187
39849 187 - Rev. 2 Page 3 of 6

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
25
Code 39849187
39849 187 - Rev. 2 Page 4 of 6

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
25
Code 39849187
39849187 - Rev. 2 Page 5 of 6

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
25
Code 39849187
39849 187 - Rev. 2 Page 6 of 6

Rev. 2
APOLLO EZ
A17 Tabletop control
board wiring diagram & layout
26
Code 58846140 - Rev. 4 Page 1 of 1

Rev. 2
APOLLO
A27
A2 7 Hardware single fault
board layout
27
Code 58848392
58848392 - Rev. 2 Page 1 of 1

Rev. 2
APOLLO
A27 Hardware single fault
28
Code 3984915
39849154 - Rev. 1 Page 1 of 1

Service Manual – Spare parts
Rev. 2
26 SPARE PARTS
1 – Electrical components
2 – Electrical cabinet and PCB’s inside the table
3 – Connections cables
4 – Touch screen
5 – Keyboard (TSO)
6 – Tabletop movement
7 – Compressor group
8 – Spot Film Device – Cassette

Cassette movement
9 – Spot Film Device – Shutters / Grid group
10 – Spot Film Device – Gripping group
11 – Spot Film Device – Cross division group
12 – Anti-
Anti - entrapment device
13 – Collimator
14 – Covers version with SID 1000 ÷ 1500 mm (39.4" ÷ 59")
15 – Covers version with SID 1100 ÷ 1800 mm ( 43.

43 . 3 " ÷ 70.
70 . 9 ")
1 6 – Tabletop
17 – Foot control
18 – Tabletop accessories

Rev. 2
1 – ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Ref. Order code Description Note
M1 6684100600 Tilting motor

-- 6684100400 Tilting end-travel group
M2 6684420100 Angulation motor SID 100 ÷ 150 cm
(39.4" ÷ 59")
6684450000 Angulation motor 380/400V version
SID 110 ÷ 180 cm
(43.3" ÷ 70.9")
6684450400 Angulation motor 415/480V version
SID 110 ÷ 180 cm
(43.3" ÷ 70.9")
M3 6691108900 Tabletop longitudinal movement Only for 4 way -
motor 380/400V version
6691109200 Tabletop longitudinal movement Only for 4 way -
motor 415/480V version
M4 4391106700 Scan motor 380/400V version
4391007700 Scan motor 415/480V version
M5 6684307200 DX cassette movement motor with
Encoder
-- 6283310300 Encoder assy
M6 6684307200 SX cassette movement motor
M7 6683317400 Grid motor assy
M8 6683314900 Shutters motor assy
M9 6683304400 Gripping motor
M10 6683331300 Cross division motor assy
M11 6684413100 SID motor SID 100 ÷ 150 cm
(39.4" ÷ 59")
6684413800 SID motor SID 110 ÷ 180 cm
(43.3" ÷ 70.9")
M13 6684613100 Tabletop transversal movement
motor
M14 6684708800 Compressor motor assy
R1, R2, R3, R4, 4192006200 Potentiometer 10K – 10gg
R5, R6, R7,
R8,R9, R11
R10 4192005200 Linear potentiometer 1.7K

Rev. 2
S25 4233104900 Ball-microswitch

S26, S27 4208404000 Microswitch
S30 4291309400 XGG12-88Z1 UL/CSA microswitch
S33 4291307800 "Crouzet" microswitch
S44, S45 4233104900 Ball-microswitch 380/400V version
4291309100 Microswitch 415/480V version
S46, S48, S54 4291309000 Ball-microswitch
S50, S53 4208404000 Microswitch 380/400V version
4291309200 UL/CSA microswitch 415/480V version
S51, S52 4291308400 "Crouzet" microswitch 380/400V version
4291309100 UL/CSA microswitch 415/480V version

Rev. 2
2 – ELECTRICAL CABINET and PCBs INSIDE THE TABLE

A1 5884843600 CPU board A1 w/o EPROM
A2 5883815200 Input board A2
A3 5884842000 Output board A3
A4 5883815600 Spot Film Device motor drive board
A4
A5, A6 4492707000 Inverter Mitsubishi model
FR-D740-050-EC
A18 4492707100 Inverter Mitsubishi model Only for 4 way
FR-D740-022-EC tabletop version
A7 5884815400 Filter board A7
A12 5884840400 Cabinet connector board A12
A27 5884839200 Hardware single fault board A27
G1 4492825000 Collimator switching power supply
-- 4695456700 HUB Ethernet
K1L 4291512300 Power rele 24V 50/60Hz
(4 NO + 1NO) K1L
K2M, K3M 4291517300 3-phases power rele 24V 50/60Hz
with filter (3 NO / 1 NC + 2 NC)
K2M, K3M
K6M, K7M, 4291514200 Power rele 24V 50/60Hz with filter K8M present only
K8M, K9M (3 NO / 1 NC + 4 NC) K6M, K7M, with 4 way tabletop
K8M, K9M version
Z1 4192211300 3-phases filter 440Vac – 10A
Q1 4291511700 3-phases breaker 6.3-10A Q1
V1, V2 4165121100 Rectifier 25A 200V
V1, V2
T1 4492823200 3-phases screened transformer 380/400V version
4kVA
4492823300 3-phases screened transformer 415/480V version
4kVA
T2 4492823400 1-phase transformer 140VA
A10 (*) 5884305400 Spot Film Device board A10
A11 (*) 5884105000 Base unit connector board A11
A13 (*) 5884305200 Angulation connector board A13
-- 6684112200 Fuses kit
(*) Inside Apollo table

Rev. 2

Rev. 2
3 – CONNECTION CABLES
X0-X74 6284821000 Emergency switch cable X0-X74
X0-X99 6284820900 SID motor cable X0-X99
X0-X101 6284820600 Emergency red button cable X0-X101
X8 6284852500 Console cable X8
X14 6284820300 SFD signal cable X14
X16 6284820400 TSO cable X16
X19 6284820200 SFD potentiometer cable X19
X20 6284820700 Table potentiometer cable X20
X44 6284820500 SFD power cable X44
X4 6284852300 Collimator power supply cable X4
X8A 6284852400 Collimator CAN-Bus cable X8A
X46 6284820800 Board connection cable X46
X68 6284820100 SFD motor cable X68
X99 6284834100 Compressor motor cable X48-X99
X105 6284821200 Board connection cable 105
10 6284821500 Ground cable N.10
X5 6284852600 Intercom cable X5

Rev. 2
4 – TOUCH SCREEN
2 (5x)
-- 6684856500 Touch screen assy
1 5884841800 Joystick board A24
2 6684802202 Knobs for joystick

(4 x small knobs + 1 x big knob)

Rev. 2
5 – KEYBOARD (TSO)
1 5884305000 Keyboard PCB
2 5484321600 Keyboard skin

Rev. 2
6 – TABLETOP MOVEMENT
3
2
6
5
1 4990806200 Closed toothed belt 16 AT5/340
2 5284610400 Toothed pulley AT5-Z26
3 5284610700 Toothed pulley AT5-Z19
4 5284612000 Toothed pulley M1-Z100
5 6690806300 Open toothed belt 16 AT5
6 6684613600 Belt pulley intermediate assy
-- 5884614000 Table Top Control board A17

Rev. 2
7 – COMPRESSOR GROUP
M14 6684708800 Compressor motor assy
S26 4291308400 UP switch
S27 4208404000 DOWN switch
S30 4291309400 Compressor force switch
R10 4192005200 Linear potentiometer 1.7K
1 2100262400 Compressor spring
2 4890311900 Cable chain
3 5484704500 Compressor cup assy

Rev. 2
M14
S26
R10
S27 S30

Rev. 2
8 – SPOT FILM DEVICE – CASSETTE MOVEMENT
1 6683317800 Tensioning pulley for cass. movement
2 6690806600 Toothed belt T5x10 L=1925mm (2 pcs)
3 5283308200 Sliding bar
4 4990805700 Closed toothed belt T5x12 L=600mm
5 6683317900 Rear pulley assy
6 5283307700 Driving toothed pulley
7 6683310000 Optical sensors with cable kit
M5 6684307200 DX cassette movement motor with

Encoder
-- 6283310300 Encoder
M6 6684307200 SX cassette movement motor
8 6283323600 Light receiver with cable
9 6283323700 Light emitter with cable
10 6684324000 Leaf spring assembly

Rev. 2
M5
5
7
6
3
4
1
M6
8
10
2

Rev. 2
9 – SPOT FILM DEVICE – SHUTTERS / GRID GROUP

GROUP
M7 6683317400 Grid 1 motor assy
M8 6683314900 Grid 2 / Shutters motor assy
-- 6690805500 Open toothed belt kit T5x8 (gripping,

shutters, grid)
-- 6690805700 Open toothed belt kit T5x8 (gripping,

grid 1, grid 2)

Rev. 2
3
1
M 7
2
M 8

Rev. 2
10 – SPOT FILM DEVICE – GRIPPING GROUP
R6
M9
S33
-- 6683300100 Gripping assy
M9 6683304400 Gripping motor assy
S33 4291307800 Microswitch "Crouzet"
R6 4192006200 Potentiometer 10K – 10gg
1 5783301200 Gripping spring

Rev. 2
11 – SPOT FILM DEVICE – CROSS DIVISION GROUP

GROUP (Only for SFD in cross)
R7
M10
M10 6683331300 Cross division motor assy
R7 4192006200 Potentiometer 10K – 10gg

Rev. 2
12 – ANTI-
ANTI- ENTRAPMENT DEVICE
1 6184200919 Anti-entrapment device for 4 way 380/400V version

tabletop
2 6184201300 Anti-entrapment device for 2 way

tabletop

Rev. 2
1 3 – COLLIMATOR
-- 4695928200 LCD automatic collimator with

square/rectangular field
-- 4695928400 LCD automatic collimator with
square/rectangular field, motorized
additional filters and camera live
-- 8611007500 Touch screen automatic collimator
with square/rectangular field,
motorized additional filters and
camera live

Rev. 2
1 4 – COVERS VERSION WITH SID 100 ÷ 150 c m (39.4" ÷ 59")

59 ")
a1 6684507700 SFD upper front cover
a2 5484503400 SFD upper rear cover
6684510200 SFD upper rear cover with anti-

entrapment device
b 6684502100 SFD front cover
c 6684508100 SFD left lateral cover
d 6684508000 SFD right lateral cover
e 6684506900 SFD lower cover
f 6684505400 Angulation cover
g1, g2 6684508600 Scanning covers kit (g1 + g2)
h 6684500519 Tabletop support arm front cover
i 6684509000 SFD left rear cover kit (i1+i2)
l 6684434602 X-ray tube main cover
m 5484610419 Tabletop arm right cover only with 4-way

tabletop
n 5484610719 Tabletop arm left cover only with 4-way

tabletop
-- 5484504019 Tabletop arm front cover only with 2-way

tabletop

Rev. 2
m
i2
g2
i1
d
g1
f
b
e
l
a2
c
n
a1

Rev. 2
p 5484500100 SID rear cover
q 5484500300 Column rear cover
r 5484502600 Rear cables junction upper cover
s 5484502500 Rear cables junction lower cover
t1 5684502700 Scanning rear left cover
t2 5684502800 Scanning rear right cover
u 5684230602 Cables chains junction bracket
v 6684100802 Cables output cover

Rev. 2
s
q
v
p
t2
t1

Rev. 2
1 5 – COVERS VERSION WITH SID 1100 ÷ 1800 mm ( 43.

43 . 3 " ÷ 70.
70 . 9 ")
a1 6684507700 SFD upper front cover
a2 5484503400 SFD upper rear cover
6684510200 SFD upper rear cover with anti-

entrapment device
b 6684502100 SFD front cover
c 6684503600 SFD left lateral cover
d 6684508000 SFD right lateral cover
e 6684507100 SFD lower cover
f 5684328200 Angulation cover
g1, g2 6684508600 Scanning covers kit (g1 + g2)
h 5484230102 Tabletop support arm front cover
i 6684500519 SFD left rear cover (i1+i2)
l 6684434602 X-ray tube main cover
m 5484610419 Tabletop arm right cover only with 4-way

tabletop
n 5484610719 Tabletop arm left cover only with 4-way

tabletop
-- 5484504019 Tabletop arm front cover only with 2-way

tabletop

Rev. 2
m
i2
g2
i1
d
g1
f
b
e
l
a2
c
n
a1

Rev. 2
p 6184504700 SID rear cover
q 5484501000 Column rear cover
r 5484502600 Rear cables junction upper cover
s 5484502500 Rear cables junction lower cover
t1 5684502700 Scanning rear left cover
t2 5684502800 Scanning rear right cover
u 5684230602 Cables chains junction bracket
v 6684100802 Cables output cover

Rev. 2
s
q
v
p
t2
t1

Rev. 2
16 – TABLETOP
-- 7184601400 Flat plastic tabletop (2 way version)
-- 7184601300 Flat plastic tabletop (4 way version)
-- 6684612800 Protection mylar for 4 way version

Rev. 2
17 – FOOT CONTROL
-- 7184854300 Foot control assy
-- 4291419500 Fluoro / Exposure switch (4

microswitches)
-- 6284854200 Connection cable
-- 2300934200 Cable protection

Rev. 2
1 8 – TABLETOP ACCESSORIES
2
3 1
4
5
1 7173151500 Shoulder rest
2 6173119200 Patient support handgrip (1 pc.)
3 6684620900 Carbon fiber patient footrest
4 8173142500 Legrest (2 pcs.)
5 7173129500 Band-tensioner with compression

band
6 7173115500 Lateral cassette holder
7 7184001200 Mobile patient loading step

Code 6984924503_Rev2

Via delle Azalee, 3
20090 Buccinasco (Milan) - ITALY
Tel. (+39) 02 48859.1
Fax (+39) 02 4881844
www.villasm.com

ENG - 6984924503 - Rev2 (Service Manual)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ENG - 6984924503 - Rev2 (Service Manual)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ENG - 6984924503 - Rev2 (Service Manual)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Medical Line

Manual revision history, code 6984924503

Rev. Date Page Description of the changes

0 18.06.2019 - Document approval.

Villa Sistemi Medicali

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Villa Sistemi Medicali

2 SAFETY INFORMATION 2-1

4 TECHNICAL DATA 4-1

Villa Sistemi Medicali i

7 THE FUNCTIONING LOGIC OF

8 IN/OUT INTERFACE CONNECTION

9 ACCESS TECHNIQUE AND

10 ACCESS AND ADJUSTMENT OF GROUP 100 DATA 10-

ii Villa Sistemi Medicali

10.1.7 TRANSVERSAL TABLETOP potentiometer adjustment (cells 115 – 116) 10-18

11 ACCESS AND DATA FUNCTION

12 SINGLE FAULT OPERATING

Villa Sistemi Medicali iii

14 OPERATING MODES 14-

15 EMERGENCY END RUN 15-

18 FUNCTION OF THE OUTPUTS

19 CHECKING THE RADIOGRAPHIC

iv Villa Sistemi Medicali

20 DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING

22 TOUCH SCREEN CONFIGURATION

23 FIRMWARE UPGRADE 23-

24 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION

25 WIRING DIAGRAMS AND

26 SPARE PARTS 26-

Villa Sistemi Medicali v

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

vi Villa Sistemi Medicali

1.1 Icons appearing in the manual

Villa Sistemi Medicali 1-1

1.2 How to contact the VILLA SISTEMI MEDICALI

1-2 Villa Sistemi Medicali

Villa Sistemi Medicali cannot be held responsible for:

Technical intervention must only be performed by qualified technicians authorised by Villa

Villa Sistemi Medicali 2-1

All movements are controlled by a powerful and sophisticated electronic microprocessor

Pay close attention to people in the X-ray room.

2-2 Villa Sistemi Medicali

Symbol indicating Symbol indicating:

Villa Sistemi Medicali 2-3

Emergency buttons on the Emergency buttons on the

2-4 Villa Sistemi Medicali

2.1.1 Electromagnetic emissions

Emissions test Conformity EMC environment of use

Villa Sistemi Medicali 2-5

2.1.2 Electromagnetic immunity

Immunity IEC 60601-

2-6 Villa Sistemi Medicali

2.1.3 Recommended separation distance

The Apollo EZ is designed to operate in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF

Villa Sistemi Medicali 2-7

2.2 Radiological protection warning

Personnel authorised to perform radiological examinations must observe the protection

Figure 2-1: Horizontal table, front view

24x30 12x30 30x24 15x24 15x12 () 10x24 10x12 ()

10x12 5x12 12x10 6x10 6x5 () 4x10 4x5 ()